IS F (2010) - Automobile LEXUS - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free IS F (2010) LEXUS in PDF.
| Product Type | Automobile - Lexus IS F (2010) |
| Engine | 5.0L V8 (2UR-GSE) |
| Power Output | 416 hp (310 kW) at 6,600 rpm |
| Transmission | 8-speed automatic with paddle shifters |
| Drivetrain | Rear-wheel drive |
| Fuel Type | Premium unleaded (91 octane or higher) |
| Fuel Economy (city/highway) | 16 mpg / 23 mpg (approx) |
| Dimensions (L x W x H) | 183.5 in x 71.5 in x 55.5 in (approx) |
| Wheelbase | 107.5 in |
| Curb Weight | 3,780 lbs (approx) |
| Seating Capacity | 5 passengers |
| Tire Size | 225/40R19 front, 255/35R19 rear |
| Brakes | Ventilated disc with Brembo calipers |
| Safety Features | ABS, VSC, TRAC, multiple airbags, pre-collision system |
| Maintenance Interval | Oil change every 5,000 miles or 6 months |
| Recommended Oil | 0W-20 synthetic |
| Battery | 12V, Group 35, 640 CCA |
| Coolant Capacity | Approx 10.5 quarts |
Frequently Asked Questions - IS F (2010) LEXUS
User questions about IS F (2010) LEXUS
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automobile in PDF format for free! Find your manual IS F (2010) - LEXUS and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. IS F (2010) by LEXUS.
USER MANUAL IS F (2010) LEXUS
natural_image
Close-up of a blue Toyota sedan's headlight with a black L-shaped grille (no visible text or symbols)
LEXUS
2010
IS
OWNER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
| 1 | Before driving | Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. | |
| 2 | When driving | Driving, stopping and safe-driving information. | |
| 3 | Interior features | Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. | |
| 4 | Maintenance and care | Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-your-self maintenance, and maintenance information. | |
| 5 | When trouble arises | What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. | |
| 6 | Vehicle specifications | Detailed vehicle information. | |
| 7 | For owners | Reporting safety defects for US owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners | |
| Index | Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. |
1 Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys 22
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start.... 26
Wireless remote control...... 37
Doors....39
Trunk 43
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats.... 47
Driving position memory (driver's seat) 48
Seat position memory (front passenger's seat) 52
Head restraints.... 54
Seat belts 57
Steering wheel....64
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror 66
Outside rear view mirrors...... 67
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows....69
Moon roof 71
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap...... 75
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system...... 78
Alarm.... 80
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) 82
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture 83
SRS airbags 85
Front passenger occupant classification system.... 97
Child restraint systems ...... 102
Installing child restraints...... 106
2 When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.... 116
Engine (ignition) switch 124
Automatic transmission...... 128
Turn signal lever.... 136
Parking brake 137
Horn....138
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ..... 139
Indicators and warning lights....143
Multi-information display...... 146
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch....150
Fog light switch 153
Windshield wipers and washer....154
Headlight cleaner switch ..... 157
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control 158
Dynamic radar cruise control.... 161
Intuitive parking assist .... 171
Driving assist systems...... 177
PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 184
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage....188
Vehicle load limits....191
Winter driving tips....192
Trailer towing....194
Dinghy towing 195
3 Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system....198
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ...... 206
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type.... 207
Using the radio.... 210
Using the CD player.... 218
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs 225
Operating an iPod ^® 233
Operating a USB memory...... 241
Optimal use of the audio system.... 250
Using the AUX adapter...... 252
Using the steering wheel audio switches.... 254
3-3. Using the Bluetooth ^ audio system
Bluetooth ^® audio system...... 257
Using the Bluetooth ^® audio system....260
Operating a Bluetooth ^® enabled portable player..... 265
Setting up a Bluetooth ^® enabled portable player..... 268
Bluetooth ^® audio system setup....274
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Hands-free system for mobile phones.... 275
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones).... 279
Making a phone call.... 287
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
Setting a mobile phone.... 291
Security and system setup...... 296
Using the phone book...... 300
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.... 306
- Interior lights 308
• Personal lights 308
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features...... 310
• Glove box.... 310
- Console box.... 311
• Overhead console...... 312
• Cup holders.... 313
- Bottle holders/ door pockets...... 315
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors.... 316
Vanity mirrors.... 317
Clock.... 318
Satellite switches.... 319
Ashtrays.... 322
Cigarette lighter 323
Power outlet...... 324
Seat heaters.... 325
Armrest 327
Trunk storage extension...... 328
Coathooks 330
Floor mat.... 331
Trunk features.... 332
Garage door opener.... 335
Compass.... 341
Safety Connect 345
4 Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.... 354
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.... 357
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements.... 360
General maintenance...... 362
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions.... 366
Hood 369
Positioning a floor jack...... 370
Engine compartment...... 372
Tires 386
Tire inflation pressure.... 397
Wheels....401
Air conditioning filter...... 403
Electronic key battery...... 406
Checking and replacing fuses....408
Headlight aim.... 422
Light bulbs.... 424
5 When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...... 430
If your vehicle needs to be towed.... 431
If you think something is wrong.... 437
Fuel pump shut off system..... 438
Event data recorder...... 439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ..... 441
If a warning message is displayed.... 451
If you have a flat tire.... 465
If the engine will not start ..... 474
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 475
If you lose your keys...... 476
If the electronic key does not operate properly .... 477
If the vehicle battery is discharged 480
If your vehicle overheats...... 483
If the vehicle becomes stuck.... 486
6 Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)...... 488
Fuel information...... 499
Tire information 502
6-2. Customization
Customizable features 514
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.... 519
7 For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.... 522
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).... 523
Index
Abbreviation list 526
Alphabetical index...... 528
What to do if.... 538
Pictorial index
Exterior
*: If equipped
Pictorial index
Interior
A
tree
| Item | Value | | :--- | :--- | | Anti-glare inside rear view mirror | P.66 | | Overhead console | P.312 | | Personal lights | P.308 | | Moon roof switches * | P.71 | | Interior lights | P.308 | | Personal lights | P.308 | | Interior lights | P.308 | | "SOS" button * | P.345 | | Coat hooks | P.330 | | SRS curtain shield airbags | P.85 | | Vanity mirrors | P.317 | | Sun visors | P.316 | | Garage door opener switches | P.335 | | Compass | P.341 |*: If equipped
Pictorial index
Interior
B
C
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Headlight switch
P.150
Turn signal lever
P.136
Fog light switch
P.153
A
▶ Without navigation system (type A)
▶ Without navigation system (type B)
A
▶ With navigation system (type A)
▶ With navigation system (type B)
B
Audio remote control switches P. 254
C
▶ Type B Type A
"DISP" switch
P.147
Distance switch * P.161
Cruise control switch *
P.158
Dynamic radar cruise control switch * P.161
Telephone switch P.280 2
Talk switch
P.280
2
"DISP" switch
P.147
Distance switch * P. 161
Cruise control switch *
P.158
Dynamic radar cruise control switch * P.161
*: If equipped
^1 : Refer to "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
^2 : For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
D
F-sport mode total control switch P.130,180
E
*: If equipped
For your information
Main Owner's Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children's safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen."
Arrows indicating operations
→ Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
→ Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Before driving
1
1-1. Key information
Keys....22
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start.... 26
Wireless remote control...... 37
Doors....39
Trunk 43
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats 47
Driving position memory (driver's seat).... 48
Seat position memory (front passenger's seat)...... 52
Head restraints.... 54
Seat belts 57
Steering wheel....64
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror....66
Outside rear view mirrors..... 67
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows.... 69
Moon roof 71
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 75
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.... 78
Alarm....80
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) 82
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ..... 83
SRS airbags 85
Front passenger occupant classification system.... 97
Child restraint systems ..... 102
Installing child restraints..... 106
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Card key (Canada only)
natural_image
Two black electronic devices with logos, labeled 1 and 2, shown against a plain background (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)1 Electronic keys
- Operating the smart access system with push-button start (→P. 26) - Operating the wireless remote control function (→P. 37)
2 Mechanical keys
3 Key number plate
1 Electronic key
Operating the smart access system with push-button start ( P.26)
2 Mechanical key
Using the mechanical key
natural_image
Two-step diagram showing a car key being inserted into a battery, with red arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)Take out the mechanical key.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P. 477)
Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
- If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
natural_image
Black electronic device with a metallic clip and red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)● To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it inside while pressing the lock release button.
1-1. Key information
natural_image
Diagram showing a black LVM drive with a circular sensor and red arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols)- If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
●The card key is not waterproof.
■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P.43,310)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (→P. 476)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
- Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
- Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
- Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
- Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
- Do not disassemble the keys.
- Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Precautions for handling the card keys
- Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key. Doing so may damage the card key.
- If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery. - Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
- If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
- When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery. Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations: - The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
- The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
- The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key*) on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
1 Locks and unlocks the doors ( P.27)
2 Unlocks the trunk ( P.27)
3 Starts the engine ( P.124)
*: Canada only
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
natural_image
Hand holding a car doorbell with a black key inserted, next to an inset image of two LVM logos (no text or symbols on the main subject)Grip the handle to unlock the door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.
natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a red arrow pointing to the handle area, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.Press the lock button to lock the door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the trunk.
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
1 Antennas outside cabin
2 Antennas inside cabin
3 Antenna inside trunk
4 Antenna outside trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a car with three colored quadrants (red, blue, green) and no visible text or symbolsWhen locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of either of the outside front door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of the trunk release button.
When starting the engine or changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from operating properly:
(Ways of coping: →P. 477)
- When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise - When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices
-
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
-
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
- When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
- When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
- When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves
- Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA) - Digital audio player
- Portable game system
- If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
STEP2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold, , or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
| Multi-information display | Unlocking doors Beep | |
 | Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's door. | Exterior: Beeps three timesInterior: Pings once |
| Hold the front passenger's door handle to unlock all doors. | ||
 | Hold either front door handle to unlock all doors. | Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once |
STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 80)
Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
- When the entry function has not been used for 30 days or more
- When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. (→P. 37)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (→P. 477)
■Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a half.)
●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→ P. 406)
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (→P.34,461)
- To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
- TVs
- Personal computers
- Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
- Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
- Glass stop ranges
- Table lamps
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■Note for the entry function
- Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
- The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes are changed.
- As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
- The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
- A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. ( P. 451)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.
| Alarm Situation Correction procedure | ||
| Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds | Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment | Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again. |
| Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked | Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid. | |
| Exterior alarm sounds once for 60 seconds | Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF | Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and lock the doors again. |
| Exterior alarm sounds once for 10 seconds | Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open | Close all of the doors and lock the doors again. |
| Interior alarm sounds continuously | Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P | Shift the shift lever to P. |
| Alarm Situation Correction procedure | ||
| Interior alarm pings continuously | Switched to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY mode.) | Close the driver's door. |
| Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the driver's door is open | Close the driver's door. | |
If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 4 7 7) $$
● Starting the engine: →P. 478
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P.406} $$
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the operation signals of the system, such as the emergency flashers. (Customizable features→P. 514)
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas. (→P. 28)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
- User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle.
1 Locks all doors
2 Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
3 Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold)*
4 Unlocks the trunk (push and hold)
5 Sounds alarm (push and hold) ( P.81)
*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Security feature
→P.34
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P.406
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P.30
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P.514)
■Certification for wireless remote control
▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch.
Entry function
$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 2 7 $$
Wireless remote control
$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 3 7 $$
Door lock switch
1 Locks all doors
② Unlocks all doors
Inside lock button
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the door and steering wheel, with two close-up insets (no text or symbols visible)The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
natural_image
Side view of a car's side panel showing the door and internal components, with a red arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set.
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
| Function Operation | |
| Shift position linked door locking function | Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. |
| Shift position linked door unlocking function | Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. |
| Speed linked door locking function | All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. |
| Driver's door linked door unlocking function | All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. |
Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP1 Close all the doors and switch the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( 🔍 or ) for about 5 seconds then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
| Function Shift lever position | Driver's door lock switch position | |
| Shift position linked door locking function | P |  |
| Shift position linked door unlocking function |  | |
| Speed linked door locking function | N |  |
| Driver's door linked door unlocking function |  | |
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.
■Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. ( P. 477)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features → P.514)
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
- Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
- Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
▶ Entry function
→P.27
▶ Wireless remote control
→P.37
Locking the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener.
1 On
2 Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
Trunk light
When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
1 On
2 Off
Trunk handle
natural_image
Exterior view of a white car trunk with an arrow pointing to the rear opening (no text or symbols visible)Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
Be careful not to pull the trunk lid sideways when closing the trunk with the handle.
■Internal trunk release lever
natural_image
Side view of a white sedan car with a red arrow pointing to a yellow seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 477)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
- Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Do not allow children to enter the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
- Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
CAUTION
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
- Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
- When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
- If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.
- Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
natural_image
White car rear bumper with red headlight and a red prohibition symbol on the side (no text or symbols on the car itself)The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
- When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
- When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught.
- Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
1 Seat position switch
② Seatback angle switch
3 Seat cushion (front) angle switch
4 Vertical height adjustment switch
5 Lumbar support switch
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver's seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
Entering a position to memory
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP2 Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.
Push the "SET" button, then within 3 seconds push button "1", "2" or "3" until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
| Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Push button "1", "2" or "3" to recall the memorized position.
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button "1", "2" or "3" before performing the following.
▶ Using the wireless remote control
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door.
While pressing the desired button ("1", "2" or "3"), push an the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened.
STEP 3 Open one of the doors
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is impressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.(→P.80)
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
▶ Using the door lock switch
Carry only the key (including the card key*) to which you want to link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door.
While pressing the desired button ("1", "2" or "3"), press the lock or unlock side on the driver's door lock switch until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened.
*: Canada only
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the "SET" button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the "SET" button, press the lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
- Operating the driving position memory after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again, even after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
- Push the "SET" button.
●Push button "1", "2" or "3". - Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat position memory (front passenger's seat)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button.
Three different seat positions can be entered into memory.
■Entering a position to memory
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP2 Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
Push the "SET" button, then within 3 seconds push button "1", "2" or "3" until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Push button "1", "2" or "3" to recall the memorized position.
- Operating the seat position memory after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF
Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger door is opened, even after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
- Push the "SET" button.
●Push button "1", "2" or "3". - Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vertical adjustment (front seats)
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Folding operation (rear seats)
To stow the head restraint by folding it forward, pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. Only the button on the right stay (when facing the front of the vehicle) can be used to fold the head restraint forward.
■Removing the head restraints (front seats)
natural_image
3D rendering of a car head with a red upward arrow pointing to the neck area (no text or symbols)Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Installing the head restraints (front seats)
natural_image
3D model of a car headrest with red directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
■Removing the head restraints (rear seats)
Pull the head restraint up while pushing both of the lock release buttons.
■Installing the head restraints (rear seats)
natural_image
3D rendering of a car seat with a red downward arrow indicating compression or dislocation (no text or symbols)Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ When using the rear seat head restraints
Make sure the head restraints are not in the stowed/folded position while in use.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
- Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
- Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
natural_image
Black-and-white illustration of a man in a suit sitting on a chair with a seatbelt, no text or symbols present.●Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
- Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1 Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.
② Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
1 Down (while pressing the height adjuster)
2 Up
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.
Seat belt comfort guide (rear seats)
natural_image
Illustration of a child inside a car seatbelt, with a red arrow indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)If the shoulder belt sits close to a person's neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners
natural_image
Interior view of a car with several people seated, one person lying on the back and another standing in the aisle (no visible text or symbols)The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-collision system will retract the seat belt, helping to enhance occupant protection.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (→P.184)
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward or pull out the belt too quickly. Allow the belt to fully retract, and then slowly extend the belt. If the belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P.106)
■ Pregnant women
natural_image
Two grayscale illustrations of a person seated in different positions, one lying on top and the other on the back (no text or symbols)Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( P.57)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
- Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.102)
- When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 57 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a red accent, showing no text or symbols on the belt (no readable text or symbols)If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
- Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
- Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
- Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or collision. (→P.58)
■Seat belt pretensioners
- Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
- If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt.
If the belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
■Seat belt damage and wear
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.
- Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
- Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
- Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
- Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
- Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer.
■ Using a seat belt extender
- Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
- Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
1 Up
2 Down
3 Away from the driver
4 Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position.
■The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. ( P. 48)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the auto tilt-away function.
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
natural_image
Close-up of a car rearview mirror with a red arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.
The anti-glare mirror default mode is automatic. The anti-glare mirror is automatically set to automatic whenever the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned IGNITION ON mode.
■ To prevent sensor error
natural_image
Two car rearview mirrors with black arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
1 Select a mirror to adjust ("L": left or "R": right)
2 Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch
■The mirrors can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 206)
■ Folding back the mirrors
natural_image
Close-up of a car door with a red arrow pointing to the side rim (no text or symbols visible)Push back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.
One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. ( P. 48)
■Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between "L" and "R").
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. ( P. 66)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
- Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
- Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Lock switch
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior with a highlighted control panel and a red arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver's switch even if the lock switch is on.
■The power windows can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ( P. 477)
- Operating the power windows after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P.514)
CAUTION
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
- Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof\*
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.
Opening and closing
1 Open\*
The moon roof stops slightly before the fully opened position. Push the switch again to fully open.
2 Close\*
*: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.
- Tilting up and down
1 Tilt up\*
② Tilt down\*
*: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.
■The moon roof can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ( P. 477)
Operating the moon roof after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
- If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP1 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch.
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. ^*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP2 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
- If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP1 Press and hold the "TILT" switch ^4 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.
STEP2 Release the "TILT" switch once and then press and hold the "TILT" switch again. ^*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position. ^*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the "CLOSE" or "TILT" switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P. 514)
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
- Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
- Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
- Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
Press the opener switch.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.
natural_image
Close-up of an electric vehicle charging plug with a red arrow indicating the cable (no text or symbols visible)Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.
Closing the fuel tank cap
natural_image
Close-up of a car charging plug with a red arrow indicating the battery, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly in the opposite direction.
Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or higher)
■Fuel tank capacity (reference)
16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal.)
■When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating direction, alongside a close-up view showing internal components (no text or symbols)The lever can be used to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch because the battery is discharged or for any other reason.
CAUTION
■Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury. - Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.
1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
- If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
- If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system correctly
Do not modify and remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is detected.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations.
●A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key with the alarm being set.
●The hood is opened with the alarm being set.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.
■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
- Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key.
●Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Panic mode
natural_image
Illustration of a car being disrupted by an electric shock device, with lightning bolts indicating impact (no text or symbols)When it is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.
●The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system correctly
Do not modify and remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.
Drive in a good posture as follows:
1 Sit upright and well back in the seat. (→P.47)
2 Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (→P.47)
3 Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.
4 Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (→P.64)
5 Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 54)
6 Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P.57)
CAUTION
While driving
- Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. - Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. - Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position:
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
▶ SRS front airbags
1 SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
2 SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
▶ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
3 SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
4 SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants.
Airbag system components
1 Knee airbags
2 Front passenger airbag
3 Curtain shield airbags
4 "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
5 Side airbags
6 Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
7 Curtain shield airbag sensors
8 SRS warning light
9 Driver airbag
10 Driver's seat belt buckle switch
11 Driver's seat position sensor
12 Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
13 Airbag sensor assembly
14 Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
15 Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(→P.442)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
- Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. - Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle's location (without needing to push the "SOS" button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P. 345)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
●The front SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
- The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 97)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
- The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximately speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
- The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 97)
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
natural_image
Four silver cars in a row showing impact from a red arrow, no text or symbols present●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
natural_image
Diagram showing car damage with red arrows indicating impact, no text or symbols present●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
1-7. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
natural_image
Top-down view of two cars with red arrows pointing downward (no text or symbols)● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
natural_image
Top-down view of a silver sedan with red arrows indicating motion, shown from front to side (no text or symbols)●Collision from the front
- Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side air-bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration ("NHTSA") advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
- Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
- Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
- If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (→P.102)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
- Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
- Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees.
- Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
- Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.
- Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
- If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
- Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
- Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components shown on P. 86. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
- Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
- If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
- If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.)
- Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1 SRS warning light
2 "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light
3 "AIR BAG ON" indicator light
4 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Adult \*1
| Indicator/warning light | “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights | “AIR BAG ON” |
| SRS warning light Off | ||
| Front passenger's seat belt reminder light | Flashing^*2 | |
| Devices | Front passenger airbag | Activated |
| Side airbag on the front passenger seat | ||
| Front passenger knee airbag | ||
| Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side | ||
| Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner |
■Child ^*3 or child restraint system ^*4
| Indicator/warning light | “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights | “AIR BAG OFF”*5 |
| SRS warning light | Off | |
| Front passenger's seat belt reminder light | Flashing^*2 | |
| Devices | Front passenger airbag | Deactivated |
| Side airbag on the front passenger seat | ||
| Front passenger knee airbag | ||
| Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side | Activated | |
| Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner |
Unoccupied
| Indicator/warning light | “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights | Not illuminated |
| SRS warning light | Off | |
| Front passenger's seat belt reminder light | ||
| Devices | Front passenger airbag | Deactivated |
| Side airbag on the front passenger seat | ||
| Front passenger knee airbag | ||
| Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side | Activated | |
| Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner D | deactivated |
There is a malfunction in the system
| Indicator/warning light | “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights | “AIR BAG OFF” |
| SRS warning light On | ||
| Front passenger's seat belt reminder light Off | ||
| Devices | Front passenger airbag | Deactivated |
| Side airbag on the front passenger seat | ||
| Front passenger knee airbag | ||
| Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side | Activated | |
| Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner | ||
^1 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
^2 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P.102)
^*5 : In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. ( P. 106)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger's seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
- Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
- Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
- Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
- Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
- Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
- If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
- When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P.106)
- Do not modify or remove the front seats.
- Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-backs. - Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
- Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
- Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P.106}) $$
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.
▶ Infant seat
natural_image
3D rendered illustration of a child inside a car seat, seated on a mountain road (no text or symbols)▶ Convertible seat
natural_image
3D rendering of a child wearing a blue car seatbelt and orange vest, seated in a car (no text or symbols visible)▶ Booster seat
natural_image
Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat, wearing a seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
- Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
- If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.57)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
- Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. - Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
- Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
CAUTION
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
- Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
- If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with three buttons and textured fabric, no visible text or symbolsChild restraint
LATCH anchors are provided for the rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
natural_image
3D rendering of a car seat with blue seatbelt and orange belt, no text or symbols visibleSeat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver's seat belt) (→P.57)
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with a close-up of the seatbelt being adjusted (no text or symbols visible)Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.
Installation with LATCH system
▶ Type A
STEP1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seat-back slightly.
STEP2 Latch the hooks onto the LATCH anchors.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
1-7. Safety information
▶ Type B
STEP1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seat-back slightly.
STEP2 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat
natural_image
3D rendered model of a mechanical component with a blue bracket, no visible text or symbolsPlace the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
natural_image
3D model of a mechanical seat assembly with a red arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
natural_image
3D model of a mechanical part with a red arrow indicating a specific feature, labeled 'STEP 3' (no text or symbols on the object itself)Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
natural_image
3D model of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating motion direction, no visible text or symbolsWhile pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
Forward facing — Convertible seat
natural_image
3D rendering of a blue car seat with orange belt, no text or symbols visiblePlace the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
1-7. Safety information
natural_image
3D model of a car seatbelt with red arrow indicating a specific seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols on the suit itself)
natural_image
3D illustration of a car seatbelt with a red arrow indicating a step 3 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
Booster seat
natural_image
Interior view of a car backseat with a blue cushion seat, no visible text or symbolsPlace the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
natural_image
Child sitting in a car seat with a red arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P.57)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a red arrow pointing to the buckle (no text or symbols visible)Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or the lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the original position.
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (→P.59)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
- If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.
natural_image
Child seated in a car seat with a red arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the object)- Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
- When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Make sure the outside rear seat head restraints are not in the folded position. - Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
- Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. - Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
CAUTION
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
When driving
2
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.... 116
Engine (ignition) switch...... 124
Automatic transmission ..... 128
Turn signal lever....136
Parking brake.... 137
Horn....138
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters...... 139
Indicators and warning lights 143
Multi-information display..... 146
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch....150
Fog light switch 153
Windshield wipers and washer 154
Headlight cleaner switch..... 157
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control....158
Dynamic radar cruise control....161
Intuitive parking assist...... 171
Driving assist systems...... 177
PCS (Pre-Collision System)......184
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage 188
Vehicle load limits.... 191
Winter driving tips.... 192
Trailer towing 194
Dinghy towing.... 195
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
Starting the engine ( P.124)
Driving
STEP1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P.128)
STEP2 Release the parking brake. (→P. 137)
STEP3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
STEP1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. ( P.128)
Parking the vehicle
STEP1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP2 Set the parking brake. (→P.137)
STEP3 Shift the shift lever to P. (→P.128)
STEP4 Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP1 Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
STEP 2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
STEP 3 Release the parking brake.
■ Starting off on a hill
Hill-start assist control will operate. ( P.177)
- Driving in the rain
- Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
- Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:
●For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
- Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
- Avoid sudden acceleration.
- Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
- Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( P.491)
CAUTION
When starting off
To prevent the vehicle from creeping forward, keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when shifting the shift lever.
■When driving the vehicle
- Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
- Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
- When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
- Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
- Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
- Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
- Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
- If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
- Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
- Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident.
CAUTION
●Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
- Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( P. 130, 132)
- When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
- Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
- Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is stopped
- Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.
●To prevent the vehicle from moving and causing an accident, apply the brake pedal or parking brake when stopping the vehicle on a hill.
■When the vehicle is parked
- Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
- The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
- Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
- Do not touch the exhaust pipes or rear bumper exhaust diffusers while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
- Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
CAUTION
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
- If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
- When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. - If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
- Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
- Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor. - When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. ( P. 467)
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following.
Brake function
- Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc.
- Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes.
Starting the engine
STEP1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver's seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns green.
STEP4
Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch.
The engine can be started from any mode.
Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the "ENGINE START STOP" switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
flowchart
graph TD
A["1 ENGINE START STOP"] --> B["2 ENGINE START STOP"]
B --> C["3 ENGINE START STOP"]
C --> D["Downward Arrow"]
1 OFF\*
The emergency flashers can be used.
2 ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns amber.
3 IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to OFF.
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. ( P. 78)
■When the steering lock cannot be released
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard with red directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will flash in green and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel left and right.
■When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch will automatically turn OFF.
Electronic key battery depletion
→P.32
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
→P.406
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P.30
■Note for the entry function
→P.33
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the "ENGINE START STOP" switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the "ENGINE START STOP" switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
- Do not race a cold engine.
- If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever and selecting a shift position
While the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
| Shift position | Function |
| P | Parking the vehicle/ starting the engine |
| R Reversing | |
| N Neutral | |
| D Normal driving* | |
| M | M mode driving (→P. 132) |
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving.
Shift position uses
| Shift position Display Function Purpose | |||
 |  | Normal D position driving | Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected according to driving conditions |
 (paddle shift switches activated) | Shift range selection (→P.130) | Allows optimum use of engine braking | |
 |  | Individual gear selection (→P.132) | Allows the driver to select gears for sporty driving |
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions
1 Snow mode
For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.
2 "Sport" mode (→P.180)
To cancel a mode, press the same side of the switch again.
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's head with two red arrows pointing to the dashboard area, no visible text or symbols.
1 Higher shift range
2 Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to 8, will be displayed in the meter cluster.
To return to normal D position driving, the "+" paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time.
Shift ranges and their functions
| Meter cluster display* | Function |
| 8 | Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 7 | Gears between 1 and 7 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 6 | Gears between 1 and 6 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 5 | Gears between 1 and 5 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 4 | Gears between 1 and 4 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 3 | Gears between 1 and 3 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 2 | Gears between 1 and 2 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions |
| 1 The gear is set at 1 | |
*: "D" is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range.
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. Gears can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's head with two red arrows pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols visible)
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated.
The selected gear, from 1 to 8, will be displayed in the meter cluster.
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations:
●When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
- When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature is low.
Gear functions
| Meter cluster display* | Function |
| 8 The gear is fixed at 8 | ^th gear |
| 7 The gear is fixed at 7 | ^th gear |
| 6 The gear is fixed at 6 | ^th gear |
| 5 The gear is fixed at 5 | ^th gear |
| 4 The gear is fixed at 4 | ^th gear |
| 3 The gear is fixed at 3 | ^rd gear |
| 2 The gear is fixed at 2 | ^nd gear |
| 1 The gear is fixed at 1 | ^st gear |
*: "M" is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
- When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
- When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
- If the “-” paddle shift switch is operated when in range 6 or above, the shift range may be lowered by two ranges or more in accordance with the driving conditions.
■Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
- When the vehicle comes to a stop
- If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time in one shift range
Rev buzzer
If the engine speed approaches the red zone, a buzzer will sound once to encourage the driver to upshift.
■Downshift restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position, even when downshifting to range 7, 6, 5 or 4. ( P. 158, 161)
■Automatic deactivation of snow mode and "Sport" mode
If the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF after driving in either snow mode or "Sport" mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P.475
If is not displayed after shifting the shift lever to M
- Within a few seconds of turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, the transmission will not go into M mode if the shift lever is moved to the M position. This is because a system check is being performed. In this case, wait a moment and then try moving the shift lever to the M position again.
- If the display does not change to on an occasion other than that described above, it may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
- When the vehicle comes to a stop, the transmission will automatically downshift to allow you to start off in 1^st gear.
- When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on a slippery road, the transmission will automatically shift to 2^nd gear for stopping and starting off.
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed while driving, make sure you return position driving and reduce speed by easing off the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to the P position and let the engine idle until the warning message goes out.
When the warning message goes out, the vehicle can be driven again.
If the warning message does not go out after waiting a while, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. However, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
1 Right turn
2 Left turn
3 Move and hold the lever part-way to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
4 Move and hold the lever part-way to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
■Turn signals can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake* (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.
■ Usage in winter time
See "Winter driving tips" for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P.192)
NOTICE
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a purple L-Zi logo and red arrow pointing to the steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
1 Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
2 Voltage gaug e
Displays the battery voltage. If the voltage is either too high or too low, the display will flash.
3 Shift position and shift range/gear display
Displays the shift position along with the currently selected shift range or gear. ( P. 130, 132)
4 Multi-information display
→P.146
5 Engine oil temperature gauge
Displays the engine oil temperature. If the temperature is too high, the display will flash.
6 Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
7 Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
8 Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
9 Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
10 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1 Darker
2 Brighter
CAUTION
■When the temperature of the display is extremely low
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the shift position and shift range/gear display. At extremely low temperatures, the display may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's downshifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
- Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
The following may indicate that the engine is overheating. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. (→P. 483)
• The engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H) - The display on the engine oil temperature gauge flashes
■When driving the vehicle
If the display on the voltage gauge starts to flash while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.
▶ Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type.
▶ Center panel
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P.136)
Headlight high beam indi-
cator ( P.150)
Headlight indicator
(→P.150)
(U.S.A.)
Tail light indicator
(→P.150)
(Canada)
Front fog light indicator
(→P.153)
"SNOW" indicator
(→P.130)
"SPORT" indicator
(→P.130,180)
Cruise control indicator
(→P.158,161)
"AFS OFF" indicator
(→P.151)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator ( P. 171)
Slip indicator ( P. 178)
VSC off indicator
(→P.179)
"TRAC OFF" indicator
(→P.179)
SRS airbag on-off indica-
tor ( P. 97)
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems. (→P.441)
*: These lights turn on when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information (→P.147)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related information.
Satellite switch mode display (→P. 319)
This switch is used to configure various function settings.
●Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (→P.171)
Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist.
●Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (→P.161)
Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control.
●Warning messages (→P.451)
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle's systems.
Trip information
▶ Type A
Display items can be switched by pushing the "DISP" switch.
▶ Type B
natural_image
Close-up of a car steering wheel's head panel showing the control buttons and a red arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)Display items can be switched by pushing the "DISP" switch.
Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ).
When the temperature drops to 37^ F ( 3^ C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds.
Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
- This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
- When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the "DISP" switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the "DISP" switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.
Gear position display
Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears that is available when the shift lever is in the D position. The gear range is shown by the number of dots (●) and the current gear is shown as a number. The transmission automatically selects the gears within the driver selected gear range.
In the illustration to the left, a range of 8 available gears (1 through 8) has been selected by the driver. (The shift lever is in the D position with 8 ranges enabled) It is possible for the transmission to automatically select between all 8 of the gears. In this case, the transmission has selected third gear.
natural_image
Abstract blue and white geometric logo with stylized letter F (no text or symbols)When in the M position, the "F" mark is displayed.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
- When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
- When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
CAUTION
■The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's downshifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.
The headlights, parking lights and other lights turn on and off automatically. (When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode)
Turning on the high beam headlights
1 With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
AFS (Adaptive Front–lighting System) improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire's angle as controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
Deactivating AFS
How to switch: →P. 319
The "AFS OFF" indicator turns on when the AFS is deactivated.
■Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■Headlight control sensor
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side mirror with a magnified inset showing the lens detail (no text or symbols visible)The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■Automatic light off system
- When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The I immediately if on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
- When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and driver's door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
off once and then back to
■Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■ If the "AFS OFF" indicator flashes...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P.514)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
1 Front fog lights off
2 Front fog lights on
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
With "AUTO" selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume.
1 Rain-sensing wiper operation
2 Low speed wiper operation
3 High speed wiper operation
4 Temporary operation
5 Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will also operate once.
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
Low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
■ "AUTO" mode
natural_image
Side view of a car with a black arrow pointing to the nose area, no visible text or symbols●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
●The sensitivity of sensor can be adjusted by turning the knob.
1 Increases the sensitivity
2 Decreases the sensitivity
- If the wiper switch is turned to the "AUTO" position while the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that auto mode is activated.
- If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194°F (90°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper operation
The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the windshield wipers.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-shield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P.514)
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in "AUTO" mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in "AUTO" mode. Take care that your fingers etc. do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight cleaner switch\*
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard showing the left panel with a black key and a red arrow pointing to a small electronic component (no text or symbols visible)Press the switch to clean the headlights.
■The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
■Windshield washer linked operation
Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will also operate once. (→P.154)
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control\*
Use the cruise control to help to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with the Nissan logo and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)Set the vehicle speed
Turn the "ON-OFF" button on.
Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed.
■Adjusting the speed setting
1 Increase speed
2 Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
- Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
1 Cancel
Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
2 Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D position. However, it cannot be set if any of the ranges 1 through 3 has been selected using the paddle shift switches.
● Vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
■Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
- Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h)
●VSC is activated
●The shift lever is shifted to the M position. - When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the "ON-OFF" button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the "ON-OFF" button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control\*
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to help to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)Selecting cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Turn the "ON-OFF" button on. Push the button once more to deactivate.
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
1 Turn the "ON-OFF" button on.
Push the button once more to deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode.
2 Switch to constant speed control mode.
(Push the lever forward and hold for approximately one second.)
- Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set.
■Adjusting the speed setting
1 Increase speed
2 Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.
Fine adjustment of the set speed can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it. Adjustment can be made in increments of approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) when in the constant speed control mode, and approximately 5.0 mph/5.0 km/h when in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
- Canceling and resuming the speed setting
1 Cancel
Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
2 Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
flowchart
graph TD
A["1"] --> B["2"]
B --> C["3"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
note right of A: Preceding vehicle mark
Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is switched to IGNITIC mode.
A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to 328 ft. (100 m) ahead of you and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long down-hill slopes.
1 Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
3 Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
4 Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.
■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. ( P. 451)
■The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
- The shift lever is in the D position. However, it cannot be set if any of the ranges 1 through 3 has been selected using the paddle shift switches.
● Vehicle speed is more than approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated.
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.
●The F-sport mode total control switch is set to snow mode.
●The shift lever is shifted to the M position.
- When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated.
●The shift lever is shifted to the M position.
- When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
| Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance |
| Long Approximately 164 ft. (50 m) |
| Medium Approximately 132 ft. (40 m) |
| Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) |
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
1 Grille cover
2 Radar sensor
Certification
▶ For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR003
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
Keep the "ON-OFF" button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
●At entrances to expressways
- When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
●Where buzzer can be heard often
CAUTION
■When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm ( P. 451) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
- When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor
- When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
- When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
- When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
●Stick or attach anything to them
Leave them dirty
●Disassemble, or subject them to strong shocks
Modify or paint them
- Replace them with non-genuine parts
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist\*
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate "Navigation System Owner's Manual" for further details.
Types of sensors
natural_image
Front and rear views of a white Lexus sedan (no text or symbols visible)1 Front corner sensors
2 Rear corner sensors
3 Back sensors
■ Multi-information display ( P. 146)
1 Front corner sensor operation
② Rear corner sensor operation
3 Back sensor operation
■ Switching the intuitive parking assist on ( P. 319)
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that the function is operational.
The display and buzzer system
■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
1 Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) from the obstacle
2 Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm) to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obstacle
3 Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the obstacle
■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
1 Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 4.9 ft. (150 cm) from the obstacle
2 Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle
③ Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
4 Flashing: Within 1.1 ft. (35 cm) of the obstacle
Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating.
●The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
• Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
• Back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
- When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
Detection range of the sensors
1 Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
② Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.
■Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
- The sensor is frozen.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
- The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
- On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
- The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
- There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
- The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
- The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• A towing eyelet is installed.
- The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
- The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are.
- The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles.
- Wires, fences, ropes etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves - Sharply-angled objects
- Low obstacles
- Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
■If the display flashes and a message is displayed
→P. 451
Certification
▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features → P. 514)
CAUTION
■Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
- Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
- Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.
TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
Hill-start assist control
Helps to prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, and EPS systems.
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes and engine output.
When the "SPORT" side of the F-sport mode total control switch is pressed, "Sport" mode is activated. (→P.180)
■PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
→P.184
When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating.
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Turning off TRAC
Turning off TRAC and VSC
Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.
The "TRAC OFF" indicator light should come on.
Push the button again to turn the system back on.
Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds to turn off TRAC and VSC.
The "TRAC OFF" indicator light and VSC off indicator light should come on. (This disable operation is not available if either TRAC or VSC is operating.)
Push the button again to turn the system back on. (This re-enable operation is not available if a wheel has lost traction such as drive wheel spinning or the vehicle is in an unstable condition.)
F-sport mode total control switch
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accommodate various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with the F-sport mode total control switch. "Normal" mode allows secure and smooth normal driving. When the "SPORT" side of the switch is pressed, "Sport" mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the ECT, EPS, VSC and TRAC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a driver may have imagined, while a sense of security is retained.
"Sport" mode/"Normal" mode
The "SPORT" indicator comes on when in "Sport" mode.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases.
■Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
- Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
- A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■Hill-start assist control is operational when
●The shift lever is in the D or M position.
●The brake pedal is not depressed.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■Automatic deactivation of "Sport" mode
When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned OFF after driving in "Sport" mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC, TRAC or hill-start assist control system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
- When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving over bumps in the road - When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
CAUTION
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the designated size and total load capacity, and of the same brand and tread pattern. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
2-4. Using other driving systems PCS (Pre-Collision System)\*
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to help lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■ Pre-collision seat belts
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. ( P.59)
■ Pre-collision brake assist
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
Radar sensor
natural_image
Exterior view of a modern sedan with a highlighted grille and a close-up inset showing the grille detail (no text or symbols)Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.
1 Grille cover
2 Radar sensor
Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
- The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds about 18 mph (30 km/h).
- The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision brake assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
- The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
- When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
- When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
- When driving over a narrow iron bridge
- When there is a metal object on the road surface
- When driving on an uneven road surface
- When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
- When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. ( P. 441, 451)
Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR003
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
- Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. - Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer. - Do not disassemble the sensor.
- Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding area.
- Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Example on your vehicle
flowchart
graph TD
A["Human Population"] --> B["Human Population"]
B --> C{Step 1}
C --> D["Human Population"]
D --> E["Human Population"]
E --> F{Step 2}
F --> G["Human Population"]
G --> H["Human Population"]
1 Cargo capacity
2 Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 660 lb. (300 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
$$ 6 6 0 \mathrm{lb.} - 3 6 6 \mathrm{lb.} = 2 9 4 \mathrm{lb.} (3 0 0 \mathrm{kg} - 1 6 6 \mathrm{kg} = 1 3 4 \mathrm{kg}) $$
In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of 258 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
$$ 2 9 4 \mathrm{lb.} - 2 5 8 \mathrm{lb.} = 3 6 \mathrm{lb.} (1 3 4 \mathrm{kg} - 1 1 7 \mathrm{kg} = 1 7 \mathrm{kg}) $$
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk.
●Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver's vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
- At the feet of the driver
- On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
- Package tray (behind the rear seatback)
- Instrument panel
- Dashboard
- Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Luggage capacity and distribution
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so will not only put load on the tires, but also reduce steering and braking performance. This could lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or even death.
- Do not overload the vehicle.
- Do not apply load to the vehicle unevenly.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 660 lb. (300 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. ( P.397)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
- Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
- Engine oil
- Engine coolant
- Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
- Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. - Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
- Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. - Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
- Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
NOTICE
■Driving with tire chains
Do not fit tire chains. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning system.
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system....198
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers.... 206
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type 207
Using the radio 210
Using the CD player...... 218
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs 225
Operating an iPod ^® 233
Operating a USB memory.... 241
Optimal use of the audio system.... 250
Using the AUX adapter..... 252
Using the steering wheel audio switches.... 254
Interior features
3
3-3. Using the Bluetooth ^® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system .... 257
Using the Bluetooth® audio system 260
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.... 265
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player.... 268
Bluetooth® audio system setup....274
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Hands-free system for mobile phones 275
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)...... 279
Making a phone call 287
Setting a mobile phone...... 291
Security and system setup....296
Using the phone book...... 300
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.... 306
• Interior lights 308
• Personal lights.... 308
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features...... 310
•Glove box....310
- Console box 311
• Overhead console...... 312
• Cup holders...... 313
- Bottle holders/door pockets 315
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors 316
Vanity mirrors 317
Clock 318
Satellite switches 319
Ashtrays 322
Cigarette lighter 323
Power outlet 324
Seat heaters 325
Armrest 327
Trunk storage extension ..... 328
Coathooks 330
Floor mat 331
Trunk features.... 332
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
▶ With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
▶ Without navigation system
Using the automatic mode
STEP1 Press
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP2 Press to switch to automatic mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
STEP3 Press "^" on
to increase the temperature and "v" to
decrease the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “^” on
to increase the temperature and "v" to decrease
the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.
Dual mode (the indicator on is dual): The temperature for the left-hand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter dual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
Only
(driver's side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
Press “^” (increase) or “∨” (decrease) on
Press to turn the fan off.
■Changing the air outlets
Press.
The air outlets switch each time is pressed. The air flow shown on the display indicates the following.
natural_image
Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)Upper body
natural_image
Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard lift (no text or symbols)Upper body and feet
natural_image
Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and gear shift (no text or symbols)Feet
Feet and windshield
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press. AUTO
The mode switches among (cycles air inside the vehicle), "AUTO" and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Press.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode when the ambient temperature is low.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press.
Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press again.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
Press for 2 or more seconds.
Press “^” (increase) or “∨”
From -3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
▶ Front outlets (center)
▶ Front outlets (right and left side)
▶ Rear outlets
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob fully to the outside of the vehicle to close the vent
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
- Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to 📋 (outside air) mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32^ F ( 0^ C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
- In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur.
- Outside air mode does not switch to
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
■The defogger can be operated when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot and burn you.
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type
▶ With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
▶ Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
GLY32AR24R
▶ Without navigation system (type B)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
CLY12AB312
| TitlePage | |
| Using the radio P.210 | |
| Using the CD player P. 218 | |
| Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P.225 | |
| Operating an iPod® | P. 233 |
| Operating a USB memory P.241 | |
| Optimal use of the audio system P. 250 | |
| Using the AUX adapter P.252 | |
| Using the steering wheel audio switches P.254 |
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user's authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
- Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
▶ Type A
▶ Type B
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP2 Press and hold the button (from to) the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP1 Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press once again.
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP1 Press SCAN
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP2 When the desired station is reached, press once again.
RDS (Radio Data System) (type A)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information.
■Receiving RDS broadcasts
The type of program changes each time is pressed.
●"ROCK"
●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
●"INFORM" (Information)
●"RELIGION"
●“MISC” (Miscellaneous)
●“ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, "NO PTY" appears on the display.
The radio seeks or scans the stations by the relevant program type.
■Displaying radio station names
Press TEXT.
■Displaying radio text messages
Press TEXT twice.
If "MSG" shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display,▶ is displayed. Press and hold until you hear a beep.
XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP1 Press
The display changes as follows each time is pressed.
“SAT1”→“SAT2”→“SAT3”
STEP2 Turn to select the desired channel in all categories or press
“^” or “∨” on 📋 to select the desired channel in the current category.
Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to (from to) until you hear a beep.
■Changing the channel category
Press “^” or “∨” on
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
STEP1 Press SCAN
STEP2 When the desired channel is reached, press again.
●Scanning preset channels
STEP1 Press and hold until you hear a beep.
STEP2 When the desired channel is reached, press again.
■Displaying text information
Press TEXT.
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time is pressed.
●CH NAME
●TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
●NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
●CH NUMBER
■When the battery is disconnected
Station presets are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
- Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
XM® Satellite Radio
An XM ^® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.—
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada—
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.
Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select "CH000" using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number
will appear.
Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM ^® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
| “ANTENNA” | The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. |
| There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. | |
| “UNAUTH” | You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels. |
| The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio. | |
| “NO SIGNAL” | The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. |
| “LOADING” | The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. |
| “OFF AIR” | The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. |
| “----” | There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. |
"CH UNAVL"
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or "CH001". If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM ^® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
▶ Type A
▶ Type B
Loading CDs
Loading a CD
STEP1 Push LOAD.
"WAIT" is shown on the display.
STEP2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.
The display changes from "WAIT" to "LOAD".
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP1 Press and hold until you hear a beep.
"WAIT" is shown on the display.
STEP2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.
The display changes from "WAIT" to "LOAD".
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
STEP3 Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press
Ejecting CDs
Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.
STEP 2 Press and remove the CD.
■Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■Selecting a track
Press “^” to move up and “∨” to move down using until the desired track number is displayed.
To fast forward or reverse, press and hold “^” or “∨” on a beep.
Scanning a CD (type A)
STEP1 Press SCAN.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP2 Press again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a CD
■ To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “^” or “∨” on
■To scan loaded CDs (type A)
STEP1 Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP2 Press again when the desired CD is reached.
Random playback
Current CD
Press (RAND).
All CDs
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
To repeat a track
Press (RPT).
■To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
Switching the display
Press TEXT.
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track title.
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press 1 (RAND), 2 (RPT), SCAN again.
■When "LOAD", "ERROR" or "WAIT" is shown on the display
"LOAD": This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
"ERROR": This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
"WAIT": Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
natural_image
Three CD or DVD discs with a red prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on discs)- CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).
● Low-quality and deformed CDs.
NOTICE
natural_image
Three CD or DVD discs with a red prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on discs)- CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
- CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself.
- Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
- Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
natural_image
Exterior view of a car with two CD drives and a red prohibition symbol (no text or labels)- Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
▶ Type A
▶ Type B
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 219, 220
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P.221
Selecting a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press 6 (∧) or 5 (∨) to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder (type A)
Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (v) until you hear a beep.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “^” or “∨” on hear a beep.
until you
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “^” or “∨” on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
Press
When the desired file is reached, press once again.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press (RPT).
■Repeating all of the files in a folder
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND).
■To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
Switching the display
Press
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
again.
■When "LOAD", "ERROR", "WAIT" or "NO MUSIC" is shown on the display
"LOAD": This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
"ERROR": This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
"WAIT": Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
"NO MUSIC": This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.
●MP3 file compatibility
- Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
- Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
- Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
- Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
- Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
- Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
- File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
- File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.
•Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
- To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz .
- CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
- There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
- When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
- Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
→P. 223
CD player precautions
→P.224
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod®
Connecting an iPod ^® enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Connecting an iPod®
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
▶ Type A
Press
▶ Type B
Press AUX
Control panel
▶ Type A
CLY3248249
▶ Type B
Selecting a play mode
STEP1 Press to select iPod ^ menu mode.
STEP2 Pressing or changes the play mode in the following order: "PLAYLISTS"→"ARTISTS"→"ALBUMS"→"SONGS"→"PODCASTS"→"GENRES"→"COMPOSERS"→"AUDIOBOOKS"
STEP3 Press to select the desired play mode.
Play mode list
| Play mode | First selection | Second selection | Third selection | Fourth selection |
| “PLAYLISTS” | Playlists select | Songs select | - | - |
| “ARTISTS” | Artists select | Albums select | Songs select | - |
| “ALBUMS” | Albums select | Songs select | - | - |
| “SONGS” | Songs select - - - | |||
| “PODCASTS” | Albums select | Songs select - - | ||
| “GENRES” | Genre select | Artists select | Albums select | Songs select |
| “COMPOSERS” | Composers select | Albums select | Songs select - | |
| “AUDIOBOOKS” | Songs select - - - |
■Selecting a list
STEP 1 Press or to display the first selection list.
STEP 2 Press to select the desired item.
Pressing changes to the second selection list.
STEP 3 Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, select "GO BACK" or press
Selecting songs
Turn
or press “^” or “∨” on
to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “^” or “∨” on hear a beep.
until you
Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order Press (RAND).
■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
Switching the display
Press TEXT.
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time → Album title → Track title → Artist name.
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
STEP 1
Press
toen
ter iPod
® menu mode.
STEP2
Pressing
changes sound modes. ( P. 251)
About iPod®
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
iPod® functions
- When an iPod ^ is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod ^ mode, the iPod ^ will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
- Depending on the iPod ^® that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
- While connected to the system, the iPod ^ cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.
iPod® problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod ^® , disconnect your iPod ^® from the vehicle iPod ^® connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod ^® , refer to your iPod ^® Owner's Manual.
Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling shuffle and repeat playback
Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.
Error messages
"ERROR": This indicates a problem in the iPod ^ or its connection.
"NO MUSIC": This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod ^® .
"EMPTY": This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
"UPDATE": This indicates that the version of the iPod ^ is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod ^ software to the latest version.
■Compatible models
- iPod® 5th generation Ver.1.2 or later
- iPod® nano 3rd generation Ver. 1.0 or later
- iPod® nano 2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or later
- iPod® nano Ver. 1.3 or later
- iPod® touch Ver. 1.1 or later
- iPod® classic Ver. 1.0 or later
iPhone ^® , iPod ^® mini, iPod ^® shuffle, iPod ^® photo and 4th generation and earlier models of iPod ^® are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod ^® or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to iPod®
- Do not leave iPod ^ in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
- Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod ^ while it is connected as this may damage the iPod ^ or its terminal.
- Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod ^ or its terminal.
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■ Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
▶ Type A
Press
▶ Type B
Press AUX
Control panel
▶ Type A
C1Y3749249
▶ Type B
Selecting a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press 6 (∧) or 5 (∨) to select the desired folder.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder (type A)
Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (v) until you hear a beep.
Selecting files
■Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “∧” or “∨” on
to select the desired file.
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
Press
When the desired file is reached, press once again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “^” or “∨” on hear a beep.
until you
Random playback
■Playing files from a folder in random order
Press (RAND).
■Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press (RPT).
■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press TEXT.
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
- If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.
Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
1 (RAND),
2 (RPT),
CAN
again.
Error messages
"ERROR": This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
"NO MUSIC": This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
USB memory
- Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
- USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
- File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media ^TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
- Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5)
- Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
- Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps) MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
- Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
- Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) - Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
- File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
- When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
- When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
• Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
- To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz .
- There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
- Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to USB memory
- Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
- Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
- Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Press
The ASL switches between on and off modes each time pressed.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■Changing sound quality modes
Press. MENU ENTER
Pressing changes the sound mode in the following order:
“BAS”→“MID”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”
■Adjusting sound quality
Press or to adjust the level.
| Mode displayed | Sound quality mode | Level Press ∨ Press ∧ | ||
| “BAS”* Bass -5 to 5 | Low | High | ||
| “MID”* Mid-range | -5 to 5 | |||
| “TRE”* Treble | -5 to 5 | |||
| “FAD” Front/rear volume balance | F7 to R7 | Shifts to rear | Shifts to front | |
| “BAL” Left/right volume balance | L7 to R7 | Shifts to left | Shifts to right | |
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle's speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
▶ Type A
Press
▶ Type B
Press AUX
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
1 Turns the power on, selects an audio source
2 Increases/decreases volume
3 Radio mode: Selects a radio station
CD mode: Selects a track, file (MP3 and WMA) and disc
Bluetooth ^® audio mode (type A):
Selects a track and album
iPod ^® mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode: Selects a file and folder
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding down until you hear a beep.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped.
Type A:
FM1→FM2→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→CD player→
Bluetooth ^® audio→AUX→iPod ^® or USB memory→AM
Type B:
FM1→FM2→CD player→AUX→iPod ^® or USB memory→AM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volume.
Hold down to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP1 Press to select radio mode.
STEP2 Press “^” or “∨” on ✅ to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold 📂 can tell you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
STEP1 Press MIOE select CD, Bluetooth ^ audio, iPod ^ or USB memory mode.
STEP2 Press “^” or “∨” on √ to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting an album
STEP1 Press ① select Bluetooth ^® audio mode.
STEP2 Press and hold “^” or “∨” on √ until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
STEP1 Press mode select USB memory mode.
STEP2 Press and hold “^” or “∨” on √ until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP1 Press rooselect CD mode.
STEP2 Press and hold “^” or “∨” on √ until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
The Bluetooth ^® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth ^® , a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth ^® , the Bluetooth ^® audio system will not function.
▶ Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
▶ Vehicles without a navigation system
| TitlePage | |
| Using the Bluetooth® audio system P.260 | |
| Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P.265 | |
| Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P.268 | |
| Bluetooth® audio system setup P.274 |
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
- If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth ^
- If the portable player is switched off
- If the portable player is not connected
- If the portable player's battery is low
- If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
- If metal is covering or touching the portable player
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (→P.298)
About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Compatible models
- Bluetooth ^ specifications:
Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
●Following profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth ^® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■Certification for the Bluetooth ^® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth ^® audio system
Audio unit
1 Display
A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.
2 Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold)
3 Selects items such as menu and number
: Selects an item
: Inputs the selected
item
4 Bluetooth® connection condition
If "BT" is not displayed, the Bluetooth ^® audio system cannot be used.
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth ^® audio system without the need to check the display or operate, and.
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
"Cancel": Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
"Repeat": Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
"Go back": Returns to the previous procedure
"Help": Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
Using the Bluetooth ^® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth ^® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth ^® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player:
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard.
STEP 4 Register a portable player name by either of the following methods:
a. Select "Record Name" using, and, and say the name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
STEP 6 Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth ^® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth ^® phone is heard.
STEP7 Select "Yes" or "No" using a voice command or and MENU ENTER. (Bluetoothe → P. 277)
Menu list of the Bluetooth ^® audio system
| First menu | Second menu | Third menu Operation detail |
| “BT·A Setup” | “Pair Audio” Registering a portable player | |
| “Connect” Selecting a portable player to be used | ||
| “Change Name” Changing the registered name of a portable player | ||
| “Setup” | “List Audios” Listing the registered portable players | |
| “Set Passkey” Changing the passkey | ||
| “Delete Audio” Deleting a registered portable player | ||
| “System Setup” | “Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume | |
| “Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name | ||
| “Initialize” Initializing the system |
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
- When driving on rough roads
- When driving at high speeds
- When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
- When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
- Operating the system with ,
and
●Registering a portable player to the system
■Changing the passkey
→P.272
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press 6 (∧) or 5 (∨).
Selecting tracks
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press ()
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “^” or “∨” on hear a beep.
until you
Random playback
Press (RAND).
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
Scanning tracks
Press SCAN.
Switching the display
Press TEXT.
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time → Album title → Track title → Artist name.
Using the steering wheel audio switches
→P.254
Bluetooth ^® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.
Error messages
"Memory Error": This indicates a problem in the system.
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth ^® audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
■Functions and operation procedures
▶ Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and :
●Registering a portable player
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)"
- Selecting a portable player to be used
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "Connect Audio Player (Connect)"
●Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "Change Name"
●Listing the registered portable players
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "List Audio Players (List Audios)"
●Changing the passkey
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "Set Passkey"
●Deleting a registered portable player
1. "Setup" → 2. "Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)" →
3. "Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)"
▶ Pattern B
STEP1 Press to select "BT·A MENU".
STEP2 Press the talk switch or select "BT·A Setup" using
STEP 3 Select one of the following functions using a voice command
or
●Registering a portable player "Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)"
- Selecting a portable player to be used "Connect Audio Player (Connect)"
●Changing the registered name of a portable player "Change Name"
●Listing the registered portable players "List Audio Players (List Audios)"
●Changing the passkey "Set Passkey"
●Deleting a registered portable player "Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)"
Registering a portable player
Select "Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)" using a voice command or
and and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (→P.262)
Selecting a portable player to be used
STEP1 Select "Connect Audio Player (Connect)" using a voice com-
mand
and
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select "Confirm" by using a voice command or
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Audio Players". When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the portable player to be used using , and MENU ENTER .
▶ Pattern A
STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say "From Car" or "From Audio player", and select "Confirm" by using a voice command or, and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern B
STEP3 Select "From Car" or "From Audio", using , and ▲ MENU ENTER .
If "From Car" is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
STEP1 Select "Change Name" using a voice command or, and MINI ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Audio Players". When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
STEP3 Press the talk switch or select "Record Name" using and say the new name.
STEP4 Select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and MENU ENTER.
Listing the registered portable players
Select "List Audio Players (List Audios)" using a voice command or ， and . The list of registered portable players will be
read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to "BT•A Setup".
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available:
- Selecting a portable player: "Connect Audio Player (Connect)"
●Changing a registered name: "Change Name"
●Deleting a portable player: "Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)"
Changing the passkey
STEP1 Select "Set Passkey" using a voice command or , and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and .
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using , and . The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing is not necessary.
Deleting a registered portable player
STEP1 Select "Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)" using a voice com-
mand
and
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select "Confirm" using a voice command or ,
and
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Audio Players". When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired portable player to be deleted using
and
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth ^® phone, the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
STEP3 Select "Yes" or "No" using a voice command or
(Bluetooth → P. 277)
■The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
■ System setup items and operation procedures
▶ Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or , and :
(→P. 296)
▶ Pattern B
STEP1 Press to select "BT·A MENU".
STEP2 Select "System Setup" using , and .
STEP3 Select one of the following items using , and MENU ENTER :
- Setting voice guidance volume "Guidance Vol" (→P.298)
●Displaying the Bluetooth ^® device address and name "Device Name" (→P.298)
●Initializing the system "Initialize" (→P.298)
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Hands-free system for mobile phones\*
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth ^® mobile phones. Bluetooth ^® is a wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
▶ Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
▶ Vehicles without a navigation system
| TitlePage | |
| Using the hands-free system P.279 | |
| Making a phone call P.287 | |
| Setting a mobile phone P.291 | |
| Security and system setup P. 296 | |
| Using the phone book P. 300 |
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
- If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth ^®
● If the mobile phone is switched off - If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected - If the mobile phone's battery is low
- If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
- If metal is covering or touching the phone
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
- If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
- If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
●Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
- When driving on unpaved roads
- When driving at high speeds
- When a window is open
- When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
- When the air conditioning is set to high
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. ( P.298)
About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5) and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth ^® phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth ^® phone.
■Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth ^® phone.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to mobile phones
Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)
Audio unit
1 Display
A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.
2 Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold)
3 Selects speed dials
4 Selects items such as menu and number
: Selects an item
: Inputs the selected
item
5 Bluetooth® connection condition
If "BT" is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.
6 Reception level
■ Steering wheel switches
1 Volume
During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call: Adjusts the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
2 Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
3 On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
4 Talk switch
Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off (press and hold)
Microphone
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without
the need to check the display or operate , and .
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.
Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
"Cancel": Exits the hands-free phone system
"Repeat": Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
"Go back": Returns to the previous procedure
"Help": Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone:
STEP1 Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard.
STEP2 Select "Pair Phone" using a voice command or, and
STEP 3 Register a phone name by either of the following methods:
a. Select "Record Name" using , and , and say the name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 4 Select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard.
STEP 5 Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth ^® audio player, the audio player can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth ^® audio player is heard.
STEP 6 Select "Yes" or "No" using a voice command or
and MENU ENTER. (Bluetooth player → P.258)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
Normal operation
| First menu | Second menu | Third menu Operation detail | |
| "Callback" - - | Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory | ||
| "Redial" - - | Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory | ||
| "Add Entry" | - | Adding a new phone number | |
| "Change Name" | - | Changing the registered name in the phone book | |
| "Delete Entry" | - Deleting the registered data | ||
| "Phonebook" | "Del Spd Dial" | - Deleting speed dials | |
| "List Names" | - Listing the registered data | ||
| "Speed Dial" | - Setting speed dials | ||
| "Security" | "Set PIN" Setting a PIN code | ||
| "Phbk Lock" Locking the phone book | |||
| "Phbk Unlock" Unlocking the phone book | |||
| "Setup" | "Phone Setup" | "Pair Phone" | Registering the mobile phone to be used |
| "Connect" | Selecting a mobile phone to be used | ||
| "Change Name" | Changing the registered name of a mobile phone | ||
| "List Phones" | Listing the registered mobile phones | ||
| "Set Passkey" Changing the passkey | |||
| "Delete Phone" | Deleting a registered mobile phone | ||
| "System Setup" | "Guidance Vol" Setting voice guidance volume | ||
| "Device Name" | Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name | ||
| "Initialize" Initializing the system | |||
■Short cut key operation
| First menu Second menu Operation detail | ||
| “Dial XXX (name)” - | Dialing a name registered in the phone book | |
| “Phone book add Entry” | - Adding a new phone number | |
| “Phone book Change name” | - | Changing a registered name in the phone book |
| “Phone book Delete Entry” | - Deleting the registered data | |
| “Phone book List names” | - Listing the registered data | |
| “Phone book Set Speed Dial” | - Setting speed dials | |
| “Phone book Delete Speed Dial” | - Deleting speed dials | |
| “Dial XXX (number)” - | Dialing by inputting a number | |
| “Phonebook” | “Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book | |
| “Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book | ||
■Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound), * (star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
- When driving on rough roads
- When driving at high speeds
- When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
- When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
- Operating the system with
●Registering a mobile phone to the system
■Changing the passkey
→P.294
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Making a phone call
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by inputting a number "Dial by number"
●Dialing by inputting a name "Dial by name"
●Speed dialing
- Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory "Redial"
●Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory "Call back"
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering a phone call
●Refusing a phone call
■Transferring a phone call
Call waiting
■ Using the call history memory
●Dialing
●Storing data in the phone book
●Deleting
Dialing by inputting a number
STEP1 Press the talk switch and say "Dial by number".
STEP2 Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
STEP 3 Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say "Dial".
c. Select "Dial" using,
Dialing by inputting a name
STEP1 Press the talk switch and say "Dial by name".
STEP2 Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Names". Press the talk switch when the desired name is read aloud.
STEP3 Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say "Dial".
c. Select "Dial" using,
Speed dialing
STEP1 Press the off-hook switch.
STEP2 Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
STEP 3 Press the off-hook switch.
When receiving a phone call
■Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch ^*1 .
c. Press the talk switch and say "Call Transfer" *2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the mobile phone to the system during a call.
^*2 : While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from the system to the mobile phone.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available:
●Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the off-hook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between calls.)
●Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory:
STEP1 Press the talk switch and say "Redial" (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or "Call back" (when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
STEP2 Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say "Previous" or "Go back" until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number using , and .
STEP 3 The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select "Dial" using a voice command or , MINI ENTER and .
Storing the number in the phone book: Select "Store" and then "Confirm" using a voice command or , and .
Deleting: Select "Delete" and then "Confirm" using a voice command or ▼, ▲ and ▶.
Call waiting
- If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
- Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service provider.
Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories.
■When talking on the phone
- Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
- Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile phones:
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : ∧ MENU ENTER
●Registering a mobile phone
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "Pair Phone"
- Selecting a mobile phone to be used
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "Connect Phone (Connect)"
●Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "Change Name"
●Listing the registered mobile phones
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "List Phones"
●Changing the passkey
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "Set Passkey"
●Deleting a registered mobile phone
1. "Setup" → 2. "Phone Setup" → 3. "Delete Phone"
Registering a mobile phone
Select "Pair Phone" using a voice command or , and , and perform the procedure for registering a mobile phone. (→P. 282)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
STEP1 Select "Connect Phone (Connect)" using a voice command or
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select "Confirm" by using a voice command or
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Phones". When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the mobile phone to be used using , and ▲ MENU ENTER .
Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
STEP1 Select "Change Name" using a voice command or, and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of the following methods, and select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Phones". When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
STEP3 Press the talk switch or select "Record Name" using and say the new name.
STEP 4 Select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and MENU ENTER.
Listing the registered mobile phones
Select "List Phones" using a voice command or, and.
The list of registered mobile phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to "Phone Setup".
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become available:
- Selecting a mobile phone: "Connect Phone (Connect)"
●Changing a registered name: "Change Name"
●Deleting a mobile phone: "Delete Phone"
Changing the passkey
STEP1 Select "Set Passkey" using a voice command or and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and .
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using, and
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing is not necessary.
Deleting a registered mobile phone
STEP1 Select "Delete Phone" using a voice command or
and MINI ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select "Confirm" using a voice command or ,
and
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Phones". When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using
and
If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth ^® audio player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth ^® audio player is heard.
STEP 3 Select "Yes" or "No" using a voice command or
and MENU ENTER.
(Bluetooth player → P.258)
■The number of mobile phones that can be registered
Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.
■ Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
●Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
- "Setup" → 2. "Security" → 3. "Set PIN"
●Locking the phone book
- "Setup" → 2. "Security" → 3. "Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)"
●Unlocking the phone book
- "Setup" → 2. "Security" → 3. "Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)"
System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
:
●Setting voice guidance volume
- "Setup" → 2. "System Setup" → 3. "Guidance Vol"
●Displaying the Bluetooth®
- "Setup" → 2. "System Setup" → 3. "Device Name"
●Initializing the system
- "Setup" → 2. "System Setup" → 3. "Initialize"
Setting or changing the PIN
Setting a PIN
STEP1 Select "Set PIN" using a voice command or , and
MENU ENTER
STEP2 Enter a PIN using a voice command or , and .
When using ▼, ▲, ▲, input the code 1 digit at a time
■Changing the PIN
STEP1 Select "Set PIN" using a voice command or , and
MENU ENTER
STEP2 Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or
and MENU ENTER
STEP3 Enter a new PIN using a voice command or , and
MENU ENTER
When using ▼, ▲ and , input the code 1 digit at a time
Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP1 Select "Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)" or "Phonebook Unlock
(Phbk Unlock)" using a voice command or , and
MENU ENTER
STEP2 Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select "Con-
firm" using a voice command or , and :
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using , and .
Setting voice guidance volume
STEP 1
Select "Guidance Vol" using
STEP2
Change the voice guidance volume using
Displaying the Bluetooth ^® device address and name
STEP1
Select "Device Name" using
STEP2
Press or to display the Bluetooth
® device address
and name.
STEP3
Select "Go Back" using
"System Setup".
Initializing the system
STEP 1
Select "Initialize" and then "Confirm" using
STEP2
Select "Confirm" again using
■Initialization
●The following data in the system can be initialized:
- Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history - Speed dials
- Registered mobile phone data
• Security code - Registered Bluetooth ^ enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the mobile phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth ^® audio players
• Guidance volume - Receiver volume
- Ringtonevolume
- Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state.
■When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
- Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or
- Adding a new phone number
- "Phonebook" → 2. "Add Entry"
●Changing the registered name in the phone book 1. "Phonebook" → 2. "Change Name"
●Listing the registered data - "Phonebook" → 2. "List Names"
- Setting speed dials
- "Phonebook" → 2. "Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)"
- Deleting the registered data
- "Phonebook" → 2. "Delete Entry"
- Deleting speed dials
- "Phonebook" → 2. "Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)"
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●Inputting a phone number using a voice command
●Transferring data from the mobile phone
●Inputting a phone number using,
- Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
■ Adding procedure
STEP1 Select "Add Entry" using a voice command or , and
STEP2 Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number: Inputting a telephone number using a voice command:
STEP2-1 Select "By Voice" using a voice command or ,
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select "Confirm" using a voice command.
Transferring data from the mobile phone:
STEP2-1 Select "By Phone" and then "Confirm" using a voice
command
and
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for details on transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say "Previous" or "Next" until the desired data is displayed, and select "Confirm" using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say "Previous" or "Go back" until the desired data is displayed, and select "Confirm" using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using ▼ and ▲
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select "Record Name" using, and, and say the desired name.
In STEP-acting "Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)" instead of "Confirm" registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
Changing the registered name in the phone book
STEP1 Select "Change Name" using a voice command or, and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select "Confirm" using a voice command or
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Names". When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired name to be changed using , and MENU ENTER .
STEP3 Press the talk switch or select "Record Name" using and say the new name.
STEP4 Select "Confirm" using a voice command or , and MENU ENTER.
Listing the registered data
Select "List Names" using a voice command or , and . The list of the registered data will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to the "Phonebook".
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will become available:
●Dialing: "Dial"
●Changing a registered name: "Change Name"
●Deleting an entry: "Delete Entry"
- Setting a speed dial: "Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)"
Setting speed dials
STEP1 Select "Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)" using a voice command or
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods and select "Confirm" using a voice command
or
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Names". When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired data using, and
STEP 3 Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select "Confirm" by using a voice command or , and .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Deleting the registered data
STEP1 Select "Delete Entry" using a voice command or
and MENU ENTER.
▶ Pattern A
STEP2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods
and select "Confirm" using a voice command or
and MENU ENTER :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone number.
b. Press the talk switch and say "List Names". When the name of the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.
▶ Pattern B
STEP2 Select the desired data to be deleted using
MENU ENTER
Deleting speed dials
STEP1 Select "Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)" using a voice command vor , MINU ENTER and .
STEP2 Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select "Confirm" using a voice command or
and
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode.
1 Front personal lights ( P. 308)
2 Front interior lights ( P. 308)
3 Shift lever light (when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
4 Rear personal lights ( P. 308)
5 Rear overhead courtesy light
6 Rear interior light
7 Front door courtesy lights
8 Front footwell lights
9 Outer foot lights
Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the shift lever light and front footwell lights.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features → P. 514)
Interior lights
▶ Models without a moon roof
1 Door position on/off
2 On/off
▶ Models with a moon roof
1 Door position on/off
2 On/off
Personal lights
▶ Front (models without a moon roof)
natural_image
Interior view of a modern office or hotel room with a monitor and a close-up of a device panel (no visible text or symbols)On/off
▶ Front (models with a moon roof)
On/off
▶ Rear
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panel and red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)On/off
1 Overhead console
2 Glove box
3 Bottle holders/door pockets
4 Cup holders
5 Console box/cup holder
Glove box
1 Open (push button)
② Lock with the mechanical key
3 Unlock with the mechanical key
Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (→ P. 43)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
1 Pull up the knob to release the lock.
② Slide the armrest.
3 Pull up the knob to release the lock.
4 Lift the armrest to open.
■ Console box light
The console box light turns on when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Using the console box to store CD cases
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a CD inside a vehicle's center with an open lid, and a black arrow pointing to the CD (no text or symbols visible)Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console box.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Overhead console
natural_image
Interior view of a car airfoil with a red arrow indicating airflow direction (no text or symbols)Press the overhead console.
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked.
Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.
Cup holders
▶ Front (press-in type)
Press down and release the front of the cup holder lid.
▶ Front (slide type)
1 Pull up the knob to release the lock.
② Slide the armrest.
▶ Rear
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt with a red arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with a highlighted car component (no visible text or symbols)Press in and release the cup holders on the rear center armrest.
■ Using the front cup holder (slide type) to store small items
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a red upward arrow and black connector (no text or symbols)Remove the cup holder insert by holding the base part.
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Bottle holders/door pockets
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a red downward arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the main subject)The door pockets can be opened and closed.
When installing the bottle, close the cap of the bottle.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
1 Forward position: Flip down.
2 Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
natural_image
Close-up of a car rearview side panel with a red arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the panel itself)Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the cover is opened.
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
1 Adjusts the hour.
2 Adjusts the minutes.
3 Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00
■The clock is displayed when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display.
Operating the satellite switches
Bring up satellite switch mode on the multi-information display.
Press "<", ">" or the "ON/OFF" button.
Select the item whose setting is to be changed.
Press "<" or "> " to display the item whose setting is to be changed.
Change the settings.
Press the "ON/OFF" button to change the settings (e.g. on/off).
Items that can be set using the satellite switches
Intuitive parking assist ( P. 171) on/off (if equipped)
Tire pressure warning system initialization ( P. 387)
ID code selection for the tire pressure warning system (→P.389)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) ( P. 151) on/off
■Changing the settings
Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions:
- Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
- Items other than the above: When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
■Display
The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period.
Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning or when the radar cruise control is used. If this occurs, press any of the satellite switches or "DISP" switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode.
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a hand operating the engine and a close-up of the engine compartment with red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols visible)Push the back part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close.
Push the lever to remove the ashtray.
▶ Rear
natural_image
Close-up of a car air vent and seatbelt with red arrows indicating adjustment (no text or symbols)Pull the ashtray lid to open.
Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove.
CAUTION
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
- Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a mechanical assembly and close-up of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)Push the back part of the lid to open, and push the cigarette lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use.
■The cigarette lighter can be used when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
When not in use
Keep the lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■To avoid burns or fires
- Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
- Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
- Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 ~V accessories that run on less than 10 A.
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with red directional arrows indicating movement, and an inset showing a USB jack (no text or symbols on main components)■The power outlet can be used when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters
Heats the seats
The indicator light comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
■The seat heaters can be used when
The "ENGINE START STOP" switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
When not in use
Set the dial to "O". The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
Burns
- Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled - Persons with sensitive skin
- Persons who are fatigued
- Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
- Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
3-7. Other interior features
Armrest
natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with a red arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk storage extension
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area.
Pull down the armrest.
natural_image
Interior view of a car backseat with a red arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)Lift up the trunk door cover.
Open the inside trunk door from the trunk and load bag-gage or other items.
CAUTION
When not in use
Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury.
3-7. Other interior features
Coat hooks
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a small vehicle with a red arrow pointing to a component, with an inset highlighting the motion direction (no text or symbols)To use the coat hook, push it in.
CAUTION
■Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury.
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mat
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
natural_image
Diagram showing a car interior with a mesh floor and a close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)Secure the driver's floor mat using the hooks provided.
CAUTION
■When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward.
● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk features
Cargo hooks
natural_image
Diagram of a car rear bumper with a box and tray, showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols)Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.
Shopping bag hooks
natural_image
Top-down view of a car trunk with attached seatbelt and a close-up inset showing the seatbelt detail (no text or symbols visible)First-aid kit storage belt
1 Loosen
2 Tighten
■ Warning triangle storage belt
1 Loosen
2 Tighten
Luggage mat
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a circular arrow indicating rotation or refresh (no text or symbols)Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
natural_image
Close-up of a car trunk rear bumper with a red arrow pointing to the opening, and an inset close-up showing the lid structure (no text or symbols visible)The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk.
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.
NOTICE
■When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged.
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink ^® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink ^® .
Programming the HomeLink ^® (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink ^® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.
1 Indicator
② Buttons
■Programming the HomeLink®
natural_image
3D rendered image showing a car front mirror and a small mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink ^® indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold one of the HomeLink® buttons and the transmitter button. When the HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink ^® indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink ^® button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink ^® button” instructions. (→P.338)
Test the HomeLink ^® operation by pressing the newly programmed button.
If a HomeLink® button has been programmed for a garage door, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type if the HomeLink® indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is of the rolling code type, proceed to the heading "Programming a rolling code system".
STEP4 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading "Programming the HomeLink®" before proceeding with the steps listed below.
STEP1 Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for the location of the learn button.
STEP2 Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.
STEP 3 Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink ^® signal and operate the garage door.
STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market
STEP1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink®.
Keep the HomeLink ^® indicator light in view while programming.
STEP2 Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
STEP 3 Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device's remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
STEP4 When the indicator light on the HomeLink® compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
STEP5 Test the operation of the HomeLink® by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink ^® buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink ^® button” instructions.
Operating the HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink ^® button. The HomeLink ^® indicator light should come on.
The HomeLink ^® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink ^® button. After 20 seconds, the HomeLink ^® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink ^® button, press and hold the button on the transmitter until the HomeLink ^® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.
Erasing the entire HomeLink ^® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink ^® memory.
Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
- The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink® button.
■Certification for the garage door opener
▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink ^® Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
3-7. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
To turn the compass on or off, push the switch.
■Displays and directions
| Display Direction | |
| N North | |
| NE Northeast | |
| E East | |
| SE Southeast | |
| S South | |
| SW Southwest | |
| W West | |
| NW Northwest |
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth's magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■Deviation calibration
STEP1 Stop the vehicle.
Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.
STEP 3 Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
Circling calibration
natural_image
Top-down view of a car with a red circular arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
- The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
CAUTION
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
- Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
- During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus' designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
System components
1 Microphone
2 LED light indicators
3 "SOS" button
Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (→P.348)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P.349)
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. ( P.349)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P.349)
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the "SOS" button in your vehicle for further subscription details.
■Safety Connect Services Information
- Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Safety Connect services will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. The services will not function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada. For details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Lexus dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle's location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the "SOS" button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.
License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
$$ \begin{array}{l} 4, 9 0 1, 3 0 7 \quad 5, 4 9 0, 1 6 5 \quad 5, 0 5 6, 1 0 9 \quad 5, 5 0 4, 7 7 3 \quad 5, 1 0 1, 5 0 1 \ 5, 5 0 6, 8 6 5 \quad 5, 1 0 9, 3 9 0 \quad 5, 5 1 1, 0 7 3 \quad 5, 2 2 8, 0 5 4 \quad 5, 5 3 5, 2 3 9 \ 5, 2 6 7, 2 6 1 \quad 5, 5 4 4, 1 9 6 \quad 5, 2 6 7, 2 6 2 \quad 5, 5 6 8, 4 8 3 \quad 5, 3 3 7, 3 3 8 \ 5, 6 0 0, 7 5 4 \quad 5, 4 1 4, 7 9 6 \quad 5, 6 5 7, 4 2 0 \quad 5, 4 1 6, 7 9 7 \quad 5, 6 5 9, 5 6 9 \ 5, 7 1 0, 7 8 4 \quad 5, 7 7 8, 3 3 8 \ \end{array} $$
■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
3-7. Other interior features
Maintenance and care
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 354
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 357
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements....360
General maintenance ..... 362
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.... 365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions.... 366
Hood 369
Positioning a floor jack ..... 370
Engine compartment ...... 372
Tires....386
Tire inflation pressure...... 397
Wheels 401
Air conditioning filter...... 403
Electronic key battery...... 406
Checking and replacing fuses 408
Headlight aim 422
Light bulbs 424
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
- Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint.
●Turn the wipers off before washing the vehicle.
■High pressure car washes
- Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
- Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■To prevent deterioration and body corrosion
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
- If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
- If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
- If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
- If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
- If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
■Exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers to become quite hot. Therefore, do not touch them while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and diffusers can cause burns.
NOTICE
To protect your vehicle's painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
- Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
- Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to the off position. If the wiper switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
- Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Synthetic leather areas
- Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
- Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.
- Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle
- Do not splash or spill liquid the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. - Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 85)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.
- Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
- Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
- Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
- Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
- Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance".
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate "Owner's Guide", "Warranty and Services Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Warranty Booklet".
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
- Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
- Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
- Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■Warning in handling of battery
- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area
- Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P.382)
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Warranty and Services Guide" or "Owners Manual Supplement". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
| Items Check points | |
| Battery | Maintenance-free. (→P.382) |
| Brake fluid | At the correct level? (→P.380) |
| Engine coolant | At the correct level? (→P.378) |
| Engine oil | At the correct level? (→P.374) |
| Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? | |
| Radiator/condenser/hoses | Not blocked with foreign matter? (→P.380) |
| Washer fluid | At the correct level? (→P.385) |
Vehicle interior
| Items Check points | |
| Accelerator pedal | • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? |
| Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism | • Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in P? |
| Brake pedal | • Moves smoothly?• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? |
| Brakes | • Not pull to one side when applied?• Loss of brake effectiveness?• Spongy feeling brake pedal?• Pedal almost touches floor? |
| Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely? | |
| Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? | |
| Lights | • Do all the lights come on?• Headlights aimed correctly? (→P.422) |
| Parking brake | • Moves smoothly?• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? |
| Seat belts | • Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?• Are the belts undamaged? |
| Seats | • Do the seat controls operate properly? |
| Steering wheel | • Moves smoothly?• Has correct free play?• No strange noises? |
Vehicle exterior
| Items Check points | |
| Door/trunk • Operates smoothly? | |
| Engine hood • The lock system works properly? | |
| Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? | |
| Tire | • Inflation pressure is correct?• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?• Wheel nuts are not loose? |
CAUTION
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
- Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
- When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
| Items Parts and tools | |
| Battery condition (→P.382) | ·Warm water ·Baking soda ·Grease ·Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) |
| Brake fluid level (→P.380) | ·FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid ·Rag or papertowel ·Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) |
| Engine coolant level (→P.378) | ·“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. ·Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant) |
| Engine oil level (→P. 374) | • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil) |
| Fuses (→P. 408) | • Fuse with same amperage rating as original |
| Headlight aim (→P. 422) | • Phillips-head screwdriver |
| Radiator and condenser(→P.380) | — |
| Tire inflation pressure (→P. 397) | • Tire pressure gauge• Compressed air source |
| Washer fluid (→P. 385) | • Water washer fluid containing anti-freeze (for winter use)• Funnel |
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment:
- Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
- Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
- Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
- Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
Be sure the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is OFF.
With the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 380)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
*: Take care when positioning a floor jack, as it is easy to mistake the engine oil pan for the jack point.
Rear
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.
natural_image
Red manual pallet jack with black handle and wheels (no visible text or symbols)- Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.
- When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.
- Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
- Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
- Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
- Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
- Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
- When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.
1 Battery ( P. 382)
2 Engine oil level dipstick ( P.374)
3 Engine oil filler cap (→P.374)
4 Brake fluid reservoir (→P.380)
5 Fuse boxes ( P.408)
6 Washer fluid tank
(→P.385)
7 Electric cooling fans
8 Condenser ( P. 380)
9 Radiator ( P. 380)
10 Engine coolant reservoir (→P.378)
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the engine compartment cover
Front
natural_image
Diagram of a car engine compartment showing internal components and a close-up of the engine component with red arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)▶ Outside
*: Using a tool, turn the nut until the engine compartment cover can be removed.
Installing the clips and nut
1 Press the tip of the clip against a hard surface, such as a desk, to allow the center part of the clip to be pushed up.
2 Insert
*: Push it down as far as it will go.
3 Press
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
- Checking the engine oil
STEP1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
STEP 3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
STEP 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
STEP 5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
STEP6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
1 Low
2 Full
■ Adding engine oil
natural_image
Close-up of a car engine hood and dashboard with a circular dial indicator (no visible text or symbols)If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
| Engine oil selection | →P. 492 |
| Oil quantity (Low → Full) | 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) |
| Items Clean funnel | |
STEP1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
STEP2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
STEP 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
- More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
- When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
- Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km)
- If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.
■After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
STEP1 Switch the display to the odometer ( P.139) when the engine is running.
STEP2 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
STEP3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000".
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
- Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
- Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
- Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. - Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
- Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
natural_image
Close-up of a car engine bay with a hand holding a white plastic container, showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)1 Reservoir cap
2 "FULL"
3 "LOW"
If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Coolant selection
Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
Brake fluid
- Checking fluid level
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and a 3D-printed device with a black knob (no visible text or symbols)The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.
Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1 Terminals
2 Hold-down clamp
3 Ground cable
- Checking battery condition (vehicles with the battery indicator)
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
1 Blue: Good condition
2 Red: Not working properly. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
3 White: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
- If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
STEP1 Shift the shift lever to "P", and turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
STEP2 Open and close any of the doors.
STEP3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the procedure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
- Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
- Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
- Keep children away from the battery.
CAUTION
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
natural_image
Close-up of a car hood with a green funnel pouring liquid into a white bowl, no visible text or symbolsIf any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and tread wear.
Checking tires
1 New tread
② Treadwear indicator
3 Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or "△marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. ( P. 444, 453)
Installing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 389)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when the tire inflation pressure is changed (such as when changing traveling speed.)
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. ( P. 319)
STEP1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P.497)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
STEP 3 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode.
1 The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display
Continue to press "<" or ">" until the initialization setting display appears.
It may take several minutes to complete the setting. Wait for several minutes before turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF if necessary.
2 Recording tire inflation pressure settings
Press and hold the "ON/OFF" button until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times and the message "PRESSURE INITIAL" showing that the initial setting is complete is displayed on the multi-information display.
STEP5 Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF.
Registering and selecting ID codes
To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the satellite switch. ( P. 319)
Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at "2ND", you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the "ON/OFF" button.
There are 2 settings:
"MAIN" position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
"2ND" position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the ID code is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
1 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code settings display
Press "<" or "> " repeatedly until the setting display appears.
2 Switching ID codes
Press the "ON/OFF" button to switch between "MAIN" and "2ND" ID codes.
- When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
- You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
Tire rotation
It is not possible to rotate the tires, as each tire and wheel is designed only for its original position on the vehicle.
Tire replacement
→P. 402
Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
natural_image
Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 5 0 2) $$
Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. ( P. 192)
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
- When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■Tire pressure warning system certification
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMV107J
Receiver: HYQ13BCE
IC (Canada) IDs:
Transmitter: 3729A-PMV107J
Receiver: 1551A-13BCE
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
▶ For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
- Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
- Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
- Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters and tire valve caps
- When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
- When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
NOTICE
- Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.
Low profile tires
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
- Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.
- Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
If tire inflation pressure becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( P. 497)
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
1 Tire valve
2 Tire pressure gauge
STEP1 Remove the tire valve cap.
STEP2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
STEP 3 Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
STEP 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
STEP 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
STEP 6 Reinstall the tire valve cap.
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
- Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. - Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset *.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as "offset".
Lexus does not recommend using:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
- When repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. ( P. 387)
■Tire and wheel replacement
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel rim with a close-up view showing the wheel being inserted (no text or symbols visible)Each tire and wheel is designed only for its original position on the vehicle.
Therefore, when replacing tires and wheels make sure that they are fitted in the position indicated on the reverse side of the wheel.
"FR": Front right-hand side
"FL": Front left-hand side
"RR": Rear right-hand side
"RL": Rear left-hand side
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
- Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
- Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
STEP1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode.
STEP2 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition.
natural_image
3D rendered interior view of a car door with a red arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)Remove the filter cover.
Remove the filter case.
Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm² or bar).
If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.
- Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance".)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the system
- When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
- When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery (CR1632)
Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
natural_image
Close-up of a black car key with a red handle and logo, no visible text or symbols on the object itself.Remove the cover.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
■If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
- The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
- Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■When the card key battery needs to be replaced (Canada only)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
- Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
- Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to OFF.
STEP2 Engine compartment (type B): Remove the engine compartment cover. (→P. 373)
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
▶ Engine compartment (type A)
natural_image
Close-up of a black rectangular electronic component mounted on a metallic surface, with no visible text or symbols.Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
▶ Engine compartment (type B)
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing internal components and a close-up of a rectangular electronic component with a red arrow pointing to it (no visible text or symbols)Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
▶ Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
▶ Passenger's side instrument panel
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a car trunk and a close-up of a battery holder with a red arrow pointing to the battery (no visible text or symbols)Remove the lid.
STEP 4 After a system failure, see "Fuse layout and amperage ratings" (→P. 412) for details about which fuse to check.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a feature, labeled 'STEP 5' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.
STEP6 Check if the fuse has blown.
▶ Type A
natural_image
Two identical 3D mechanical component diagrams labeled 1 and 2, showing internal channels (no text or symbols on the components themselves)▶ Type B
natural_image
Two identical diagrams of a container with internal components, labeled 1 and 2, showing no text or symbols.▶ Type C
natural_image
Two identical illustrations of a metal pipe fitting with a base, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the parts themselves)1 Normal fuse
② Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
1 Normal fuse
② Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
1 Normal fuse
② Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
▶ Type D
natural_image
Two metallic mechanical components labeled 1 and 2, showing a curved transition or fracture (no text or symbols on the parts themselves)1 Normal fuse
② Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B)
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with red arrows pointing to internal features (no visible text or symbols)Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side.
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment (type A)
![[ ] [1] 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 [2] 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 [3] 19 [4] [7] [5] [8] [6] [9]](/content/2026/05/1018527/images/4c1560f70c4c165366d899847e80dc4dc714b4f8c3d4657053604209f321c877.jpg)
ELY43AR512
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | |||
| 1 | ALT-S 75A Charging system | ||
| 2 | TURN-HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers, turn signals | ||
| 3 | IG2 MAIN 20 A IG2, IGN, GAUGE | ||
| 4 | RAD NO. 2 30 A Audio system | ||
| 5 | D/C CUT 20 A DOME, MPX-B | ||
| 6 | RAD NO. 1 | 30 A Audio system | |
| 7 | MPX-B | 10 A | Headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, windshield washer, horns, power door lock system, power windows, power seats, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, meters and gauges, smart access system with push-button start, outside rear view mirrors, air conditioning system |
| 8 | DOME | 10 A | Interior lights, meters and gauges, front footwell lights |
| 9 | CDS | 10 A | Electric cooling fans |
| Fuse Ampere | Circuit | ||
| 10 | E/G-B 60 A | FR CTRL-B, ETCS, A/F, STR LOCK, INJ2, TEL | |
| 11 | P/I-B | 60 A | EFI, F/PMP, INJ |
| 12 | ABS 150 A VDIM | ||
| 13 | RH J/B-B 30 A FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH, AM2 | ||
| 14 | VVT 40 A | Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem | |
| 15 | MAIN 30 A | H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR, headlight low beams | |
| 16 | STARTER 30 A | Smart access system with push-button start | |
| 17 | LH J/B-B 30 A | FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH, SECURITY | |
| 18 | EPS 80 A Electric power steering | ||
| 19 | ALT | 180 A | LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, HEATER, FAN1, FAN2, DEFOG, RH J/B-AM, ABS 2 |
| 20 | LH J/B-AM | 80 A | S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1, A/C, F/OPN, PSB, FR WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH, PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR, TV NO. 2, FR S/HTR LH |
| 21 | RH J/B-AM | 80 A | OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT RH, RAD NO. 3, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG, PWR OUTLET |
| 22 | ABS2 | 30 A VDIM | |
| 23 | DEFOG | 50 A Rear window defogger | |
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | ||
| 24 | FAN240 A Electric cooling fans | |
| 25 | FAN140 A Electric cooling fans | |
| 26 | HEATER 50 A CDS, air conditioning system | |
| 27 | E/G-AM 60 A H-LP CLN, FR CTRL AM | |
Engine compartment (type B)
1426A0074
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | |||
| 1 | SPARE 30 A Spare fuse | ||
| 2 | SPARE 25 A Spare fuse | ||
| 3 | SPARE 10 A Spare fuse | ||
| 4 | FR CTRL-B 25 A HORN, H-LP HI | ||
| 5 | A/F 15 A Exhaust system | ||
| 6 | ETCS 10 A | Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem | |
| 7 | TEL 10 A Safety connect | ||
| 8 | INJ2 25 A | Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem | |
| 9 | STR LOCK | 25 A | Steering lock system |
| 10 | H-LP CLN | 30 A Headlight cleaner | |
| 11 | DEICER | 25 A | —— |
| 12 | FR CTRL-AM | 30 A | FR FOG, WASHER, FR TAIL |
| Fuse | Ampere | Circuit | |
| 13 | IG2 10 A Ignition system | ||
| 14 | EFI NO. 2 10 A | Fuel system, exhaust system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system | |
| 15 | H-LP R LWR 15 A | Headlight low beam (right) | |
| 16 | H-LP L LWR 15 A | Headlight low beam (left) | |
| 17 | F/PMP25 A Fuel system | ||
| 18 | EFI 25 A | Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem | |
| 19 | INJ 25 A | Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem | |
| 20 | H-LP UPR | 15 A Headlight beams | |
| 21 | HORN | 10 A Horns | |
| 22 | WASHER | 20 A | Windshield washer |
| 23 | FR TAIL | 10 A | Parking lights, side marker lights |
| 24 | FR FOG | 15 A Front fog lights | |
Driver's side instrument panel
43KY0911
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | |||
| 1 | FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat | ||
| 2 | A/C 75A Air conditioning system | ||
| 3 | MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers | ||
| 4 | TV NO.1 | 10 A Display | |
| 5 | FUEL OPEN | 10 A | Fuel filler door opener |
| 6 | TV NO.2 | 75A | —— |
| 7 | PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt | ||
| 8 | S/ROOF | 25 A | Moon roof |
| 9 | TAIL | 10 A | Tail lights, license plate lights, rear side marker lights |
| 10 | PANEL | 7.5 A | Switch illumination, air conditioning system, display, safety connect, cigarette lighter illumination, shift lever light, instrument panel lights |
| 11 | RR FOG 75A | —— | |
| 12 | ECU-IG LH | 10 A | Cruise control, air conditioning system, electric power steering, shift lock system, moon roof, tire inflation pressure warning system |
| 13 | FR S/HTR LH 15 A | Seat heaters | |
| 14 | RR DOOR LH 20 A | Power windows | |
| 15 | FR DOOR LH 20 A | Power windows, outside rear view mirror (left) | |
| 16 | SECURITY 7.5A | Smart access system with push-button start | |
| 17 | H-LP LVL 7.5AAFS | ||
| 18 | LH-IG | 10 A | Charging system, headlight cleaner, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights, outside rear view mirror defoggers, seat belts, intuitive parking assist, air conditioning system |
| 19 | FR WIP | 30 A | Windshield wipers |
- Passenger's side instrument panel
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | |||
| 1 | FR P/SEAT RH 30 | A Power seat | |
| 2 | DOOR DL 15 A | —— | |
| 3 | OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system | ||
| 4 | STOP SW 7.5 A Stop lights, VDIM, shift lock system | ||
| 5 | TI & TE 20 A | Electric tilt and telescopic steering column | |
| 6 | RAD NO. 3 | 10 A | Audio system |
| 7 | GAUGE | 7.5 A Meters and gauges | |
| 8 | IGN 10 A | SRS airbag system, stop lights, steering lock system, fuel system, front passenger occupant classification system, safety connect | |
| 9 | ACC | 75 A | Clock, air conditioning system, audio system, navigation system, display, outside rear view mirrors, smart access system with push-button start, glove box light, console box light, safety connect |
| 10 | CIG | 15 A | Cigarette lighter |
| 11 | PWR OUTLET | 15 A | Power outlet |
| Fuse Ampere Circuit | ||
| 12 | RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows | |
| 13 | FR DOOR RH 20 A | Power windows, outside rear view mirrors |
| 14 | AM2 75A | Smart access system with push-button start |
| 15 | RH-IG 75A | Seat belts, intuitive parking assist, automatic transmission, seat heaters |
| 16 | FR S/HTR RH 15 A Seat heaters | |
| 17 | ECU-IG RH 10 A | Power seats, smart access system with push-button start, outside rear view mirrors, VDIM, air conditioning sys-tem, pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt and telescopic steering, power win-dows, navigation system, headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, license plate lights, windshield washer |
■After a fuse is replaced
- If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 424)
- If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
- Do not modify the fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
■Removing the engine compartment cover.
→P.373
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical assembly with numbered components (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels1 Adjustment bolt A
2 Adjustment bolt B
Before checking the headlight aim
STEP1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed.
STEP2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver's seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
■Adjusting the headlight aim
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a red circular arrow indicating rotation, no visible text or symbolsTurn bolt A in either direction using a Phillips-head screw-driver.
Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.
Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Preparing a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 498)
Bulb locations
Replacing light bulbs
Back-up lights
natural_image
Close-up of a car's rear bumper with visible structural elements and mounting points (no text or symbols)Open the trunk door and remove the cover clips.
Partly remove the cover. Remove the wire harness and turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
natural_image
3D illustration of a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal lights
natural_image
Close-up of a metallic oval object with a red arrow indicating a feature, placed on a gray surface (no text or symbols visible)Open the trunk door and remove the cover.
Remove the connector and turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating motion, no visible text or symbolsRemove the light bulb.
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it.
●Headlight high beams
●Front fog lights
●Parking lights
●Front turn signal lights
●Front side marker lights
- Stop/tail lights
●Tail lights
●Rear side marker lights
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights
●Headlight low and high beams (discharge bulbs)
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
■LED tail lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
The tail lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
- Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
- Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. - Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■Discharge headlights
- Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light bulbs).
- Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight's high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...... 430
If your vehicle needs to be towed 431
If you think something is wrong 437
Fuel pump shut off system.... 438
Event data recorder 439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.... 441
If a warning message is displayed.... 451
If you have a flat tire.... 465
If the engine will not start ..... 474
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P 475
If you lose your keys 476
If the electronic key does not operate properly.... 477
If the vehicle battery is discharged 480
If your vehicle overheats ..... 483
If the vehicle becomes stuck....486
5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the vehicle's front wheels and axles must be in good condition. (→P. 435)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
natural_image
Front view of a Lexus sedan car with a black arrow pointing to the nose area (no visible text or symbols)Towing eyelet
Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Put the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in ACCESSORY mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
CAUTION
Caution while towing
- Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always use caution for the surroundings and other vehicles while towing. - If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
Installing the towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
→P. 465
CAUTION
■Installing the towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that the towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, the towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling- type truck, either from the front or rear.
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
▶ From the front
natural_image
Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car on a road (no text or symbols)Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
▶ From the rear
natural_image
Silhouette of a truck and a sedan on a road, no text or symbols presentTurn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to the ACCESSORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
- Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
- When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45^ .
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal
Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
- Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP1 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF.
STEP2 Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
- Driver's seat position
- Front passenger's occupant classification
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
- An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
●Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
●Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) ^*
- Low brake fluid
- Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
→P. 455
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
| Warning light Warning light/Details | |
| ABS (U.S.A.) | ABS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The ABS; orThe brake assist system. |
| (Canada) | |
 | Electric power steering warning lightIndicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. |
 | Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. |
Electric power steering warning light
When the battery is low or when the voltage drops temporarily, the electric power steering warning light may come on.
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly hold and operate it using more force than usual.
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
| Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure | ||
 | Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed. | Check that all doors and the trunk are closed. |
 | Low fuel level warning light Remaining fuel (Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L, 2.4 Imp. gal.] or less) | Refuel the vehicle. |
 (On the instrument cluster) | Driver's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt. | Fasten the seat belt. |
 (On the center panel) | Front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt. | Fasten the seat belt. |
 | Tire pressure warning light | |
| When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure | Adjust the tire inflation pressure. | |
| When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system | Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer. | |
| Warning light | Warning light/Details Correction procedure | |
 | Master warning lightA buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. | →P. 451 |
*2: Driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer:
The driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
- If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
- If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
- If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
- If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
- If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch.
- If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm ^2 or bar) or higher.
- If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
- If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
- If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel housings.
- If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the "ENGINE START STOP" switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features → P.514)
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
- Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
- If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
- Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
1 Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
2 Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message Details
(Flashing)
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.
(Flashing)
Indicates that the engine oil temperature is too high.
The engine oil temperature gauge display will also flash. ( P.139)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
| Warning message Details | |
 | |
 (Flashing) | |
 | |
 | |
 (If equipped) | |
 | |
 (If equipped) |
Warning message Details
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system.
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off.
| Warning message Details | Correction procedure | |
 RIGHT FRONT DOOR | Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. | Make sure that all of the doors are closed. |
 LEFT FRONT DOOR | ||
 RIGHT REAR DOOR | flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). | |
 LEFT REAR DOOR | ||
 HOOD OPEN | Indicates that the hood is not fully closed. | Close the hood. |
| flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). |
| Warning message Details Correction procedure | |||
 TRUNK OPEN | Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed.  flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). | Close the trunk. | |
  (Flashing) (If equipped) | Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and the driver's door opened). | Close the moon roof. | |
 | Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged.  flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). | Release the parking brake. | |
  (Flashing) | Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high | →P. 135 | |
| Warning message Details | Correction procedure | ||
 | Indicates that the washer fluid level is low. | Add washer fluid. | |
 | |||
 | Indicates that engine oil level is low. | Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope.Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears. | |
 | |||
 | Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. | Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. | |
 (U.S.A. only) | Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.) | ||
 | Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. | ||
 (U.S.A. only) | Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset). | Check and change the engine oil. | |
 | Indicates that the pre-collision system is not currently functional. | Clean the grille and the sensor.This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down. | |
 (Flashing)(If equipped) | |||
 | Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice. | Clean the sensor. | |
 (If equipped) | |||
 | Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice. | Clean the sensor. | |
| (Flashing and then continuously on) | |||
 | (Flashing) | ||
 | |||
| (If equipped) | |||
 | Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance. | Switch the driving mode to either the “Normal” or “Sport” mode.If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode. | |
| (Flashing and then continuously on) | |||
 | (Flashing) | ||
 | |||
| (If equipped) | |||
 | 60MPH | Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode). | Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes. |
| (Flashing)(If equipped) | |||
■Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. ( P. 374)
■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases.
- When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
- When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
- Immediately after cruise control speed is set
- At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
| Interior buzzer | Exterior buzzer | Warning message Details | Correction procedure | |
| Once— |  (Comes on for 10 seconds.) | Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally. | Start the engine with the electronic key present.* | |
| Once | 3 times |   (Flashing) | Indicates that a door other than the driver's door has been opened and closed with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. | Confirm the location of the electronic key. |
| Interior buzzer | Exterior buzzer | Warning message Details | Correction procedure | |
| Once | 3 times |  | Indicates that the driver's door has been opened and closed with the shift lever in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. | Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key. |
| Continuous | Continuous |  | Indicates that the driver's door has been opened and closed with the shift lever out of in P, the "ENGINE START STOP" switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. | Shift the shift lever to P. Confirm the location of the electronic key. |
 | ||||
(Displayed alternately)  (Flashing) | ||||
| Interior buzzer | Exterior buzzer | Warning message Details | Correction procedure | |
| Once— |  (Comes on for 10 seconds.) (Flashing) | Indicates that the key battery is low. | Replace the bat-tery. (→P. 406) | |
| — | — |  | Indicates that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned twice to ACCES-SORY mode without starting the engine when a closed door is opened. | Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while applying the brakes. |
| — | — |   (Flashing) | Indicates that the steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. | Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turn-ing the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed. |
| Interior buzzer | Exterior buzzer | Warning message Details | Correction procedure |
| Once— | DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL, AND TOUCH THE ENGINE SWITCH WITH THE KEY | Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly.→P. 478 | |
| Once— | TO START, DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL, AND PUSH THE ENGINE SWITCH |
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (→P.30)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided. The spare tire can only be used on the front wheels.
Before jacking up the vehicle
- Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
- Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P. - Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Taking out the spare tire
Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor.
Secure the panel using the hook provided.
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a red circular arrow symbol on top, labeled 'STEP 3' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
Replacing a flat tire
natural_image
3D rendering of a car with a black arrow pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)Chock the tires.
| Flat tire | Wheelchock positions | |
| Front | Left-hand side | Behind the rear right-hand side tire |
| Right-hand side | Behind the rear left-hand side tire | |
| Rear | Left-hand side | In front of the front right-hand side tire |
| Right-hand side | In front of the front left-hand side tire | |
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel rim with a red arrow pointing to the side, labeled STEP 2 (no text on the wheel or background)Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion "A" by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
natural_image
Mechanical diagram showing a car wheel connected to a linkage with a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
natural_image
Close-up of hands cleaning a car wheel rim (no text or symbols visible)Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
natural_image
Hand cleaning a tire with a cloth, labeled 'STEP 1' (no other text or symbols)
natural_image
Hand cleaning a dark liquid in a circular basin (no text or symbols visible)Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
STEP 5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(→P. 497)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 387)
CAUTION
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
- Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires.
- Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. - Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
- Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
- Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
- When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
- Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
- Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
- Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
- Do not use the compact spare tire as a rear tire. If you have a flat rear tire, replace a front tire with the compact spare tire first and then replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front.
- Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
- Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
- Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■When the spare tire is installed
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & brake assist
VSC
TRAC
VDIM
●Navigation system (if equipped)
●Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
● Cruise control (if equipped)
●PCS (if equipped)
• AFS
LSD
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.
- Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
- Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( P. 124), consider each of the following points.
The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
- There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (→P.124)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 480)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 480)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P.78)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP1 Set the parking brake.
STEP2 Turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 3 Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. ( P.22)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P. 30) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
▶ Doors
natural_image
Close-up of a white door handle with a red arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)
Remove the cover on the driver's door handle using the mechanical key ( P. 23) in order to perform the following operations.
1 Locks all doors
2 Closes the windows/moon roof (turn and hold)
3 Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.
4 Opens the windows/moon roof (turn and hold)
Return the cover to the original position after use.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Trunk
natural_image
Close-up of a car door panel with a red arrow and circular features, no visible text or symbolsTurn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes and starting the engine
STEP1 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the "ENGINE START STOP" switch.
natural_image
Close-up of a hand inserting a USB flash into a car door panel (no visible text or symbols)An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the "ENGINE START STOP" switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch.
STEP3 To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P.124)
To start the engine: Press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the "ENGINE START STOP" switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.
(→P.406)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.
Connecting the jumper cables.
1 Remove the engine cover.
2 Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
3 Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
4 Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
5 Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.
STEP2 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 3 Open and close any of the doors with the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF.
STEP 4 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the "ENGINE START STOP" switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle's engine.
STEP 5 Once the vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
- Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the "+" and "-" terminals.
- Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
- When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
- Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. - Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
If your engine overheats:
STEP1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system.
STEP2 Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-sides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
STEP3 Remove the engine compartment cover (front). (→P. 373)
STEP 4 Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer.
natural_image
Top-down view of a car's engine bay with visible fan blades and dashboard (no text or symbols)After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
natural_image
Close-up of a funnel pouring liquid into a white container on a stainless steel surface (no text or symbols visible)Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant is unavailable. ( P.493)
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
- If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.
- Keep hands and clothing away from the fans and belt while the engine is running.
- Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
STEP2 Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
STEP3 Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.
STEP 4 Restart the engine.
STEP 5 Shift the shift lever to the D or R position, release the parking brake and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. ( P.179)
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
- If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) 488
Fuel information...... 499
Tire information....502
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ..... 514
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize 519
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
| Overall length 183.4 in. (4660 mm) | |
| Overall width 71.4 in. (1815 mm) | |
| Overall height* 55.7 in. (1415 mm) | |
| Wheelbase 107.4 in. (2730 mm) | |
| Tread | Front 61.4 in. (1560 mm) |
| Rear 59.6 in. (1515 mm) | |
| Vehicle capacity weight(Occupants + luggage) | 660 lb. (300 kg) |
*: Unladen vehicle
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side profile with a black arrow pointing to a rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a rectangular feature (no visible text or symbols)This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.
natural_image
Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbolsThis number is also on the Certification Label.
6-1. Specifications
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
natural_image
Illustration of a mechanical component with gears and a lightning bolt (no text or symbols)Engine
| Model 2UR-GSE | |
| Type8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline | |
| Bore and stroke | 3.70 × 3.52 in. (94.0 × 89.5 mm) |
| Displacement 303.2 cu. in. (4969 cm 3) | |
| Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment | |
Fuel
| Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only |
| Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher |
| Fuel tank capacity 16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal) |
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
(Reference)
without filter 8.7 qt. (8.2 L, 7.2 Imp. qt.)
with filter 9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.2 Imp. qt.)
Engine oil selection
"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.
The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates a characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
| Capacity 12.6 qt. (11.9 L, 10.5 Imp. qt.) | |
| Coolant type | Use either of the following. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. |
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning the engine.
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at 68°F (20°C):
12.6—12.8 V Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V Half charged
11.8—12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Differential
Oil capacity 1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
"Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX 75W-85 GL-5" or equivalent
*: "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" is filled in your Lexus vehicle at the factory. Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity* 11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Brakes
| Pedal clearance*1 | 4.3 in. (110 mm) Min. |
| Pedal free play | 0.04—0.08 in. (1.0—2.0 mm) |
| Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) | |
| Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) | |
| Parking brake pedal travel*2 | 7—9 clicks |
| Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 | |
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf).
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
| Tire size | Front: 225/40R19 93Y Rear: 255/35R19 96Y Spare: T135/70R18 103M |
| Front and rear tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) | Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 9.0 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. |
| Wheel size | Front wheels: 19 × 8J Rear wheels: 19 × 9J Spare wheel: 18 × 4T |
| Wheel nut torque 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) | |
Light bulbs
| Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type | ||||
| Exterior | HeadlightsHigh beamLow/high beam | 9005D4S | 6035 | DA |
| Front turn signal lights — 21C | ||||
| Parking lights | 168 | 5 | E | |
| Front fog lights | — | 55 | B | |
| Rear turn signal lights | — 21C | |||
| Back-up lights | 921 | 16 | E | |
| Outer foot lights | — | 5 | E | |
| Interior | Vanity lights | — | 8 | E |
| Interior lightsFrontRear | — 5 | 3 | EF | |
| Rear overhead courtesy light | — | 3 | F | |
| Front door courtesy lights | — | 5 | E | |
| Trunk light | — | 5 | F | |
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: HB3 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If your engine knocks
- Consult your Lexus dealer.
- You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
- Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.
■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
- Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
- If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
- Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
- Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. - Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. - Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
Typical tire symbols
▶ Standard tire
▶ Compact spare tire
1 Tire size ( P. 504)
2 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( P. 504)
3 Location of treadwear indicators ( P. 386)
4 Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
5 Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.
6 TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
7 Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P. 392)
8 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.497)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9 Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see "Uniform tire quality grading" that follows.
10 Summer tire or all season tire ( P. 392)
An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.
11 "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" (→P.470)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
1 DOT symbol*
② Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer's identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
1 Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)
② Section width (millimeters)
3 Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
4 Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
5 Wheel diameter (inches)
6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
Tire dimensions
1 Section width
② Tire height
3 Wheel diameter
Tire section names
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing rubber
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
| Tire related term Meaning | |
| Cold tire inflation pressure | Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition |
| Maximum inflation pressure | The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire |
| Recommended inflation pressure | Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer. |
| Accessory weight | The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) |
| Curb weight | The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine |
| Maximum loaded vehicle weight | The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight |
| Normal occupant weight | 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows |
| Occupant distribution | Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below |
| Production options weight | The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim |
| Rim | A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated |
| Rim diameter(Wheel diameter) | Nominal diameter of the bead seat |
| Rim size designation Rim diameter and width | |
| Rim type designation | The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code |
| Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges | |
| Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity) | The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity |
| Vehicle maximum load on the tire | The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two |
| Vehicle normal load on the tire | The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing it by two |
| Weather side | The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire |
| Bead | The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim |
| Bead separation | A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead |
| Bias ply tire | A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread |
| Carcass | The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load |
| Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall | |
| Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire | |
| Cord separation | The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds |
| Cracking | Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material |
| CT | A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire |
| Extra load tire | A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire |
| Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs | |
| Innerliner | The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire |
| Innerliner separation | The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass |
| Intended outboard side-wall | (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle |
| Light truck (LT) tire | A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles |
| Load rating | The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure |
| Maximum load rating | The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire |
| Maximum permissible inflation pressure | The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated |
| Measuring rim | The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements |
| Open splice | Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material |
| Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire | |
| Overall width | The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs |
| Passenger car tire | A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. |
| Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords | |
| Ply separation | A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies |
| Pneumatic tire | A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load |
| Radial ply tire | A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread |
| Reinforced tire | A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire |
| Section width | The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands |
| Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead | |
| Sidewall separation | The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall |
| Snow tire | A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall |
| Test rim | The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire |
| Tread | That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road |
| Tread rib | A tread section running circumferentially around a tire |
| Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass | |
| Treadwear indicators (TWI) | The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread |
| Wheel-holding fixture | The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing |
*: Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
| Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants | Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants | Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle |
| 2 through 4 2 2 in front | ||
| 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat | ||
| 11 through 15 5 | 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat | |
| 16 through 20 7 | 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat |
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
| Item Function Default setting | Customized setting | ||
| Smart access system with push-button start (→P.26) | Operation signal (Emergency flashers) | On Off | |
| Operation signal (Buzzer) | On Off | ||
| Wireless remote control (→P.37) | Unlocking operation | Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps | All doors unlocked in one step |
| Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked | On Off | ||
| Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked | 60 seconds | 30 seconds | |
| 120 seconds | |||
| Wireless remote con- trol (→P. 37) | Operation signal (Emergency flashers) | On Off | |
| Operation signal (Buzzer) | On Off | ||
| Door lock buzzer On Off | |||
| Trunk unlocking function On Off | |||
| Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold | Push twice | ||
| One short push | |||
| Panic function On Off | |||
| Door lock (→P.39) | Unlocking using a key | Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps | All doors unlocked in one step |
| Speed-detecting auto- matic door lock function | Off On | ||
| Opening driver's door unlocks all doors | Off On | ||
| Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors | On Off | ||
| Shifting gears to a posi- tion other than P locks all doors | On Off | ||
| Steering wheel (→P. 64) | Auto tilt-away function On Off | ||
| Power windows (→P.69) | Linked door lock operation | On Off | |
| Linked door key operation | Open and close | Open only | |
| Close only | |||
| Wireless remote control linked operation | Off Open only | ||
| Linked door lock operation | On Off | ||
| Moon roof (→P.71) | Linked door key operation | Open and close | Open only |
| Close only | |||
| Linked operation of components when door key is used | Slide only Tilt only | ||
| Wireless remote control linked operation | Off Open only | ||
| Linked operation of components when wireless remote control is used | Off | Slide only | |
| Tilt only | |||
| Automatic light control system (→P.150) | Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 | ||
| Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed | 30 seconds | 0 seconds | |
| 60 seconds | |||
| 90 seconds | |||
| Lights (→P.151) | Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only) | On Off | |
| Windshield wipers and washer (→P. 154) | Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary | On Off | |
| Drip prevention function On Off | |||
| Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates | Variable depending on the vehicle speed | 3 seconds | |
| Intuitive parking assist (→P. 171) | Back sensor operation display and buzzer | On Off | |
| Buzzer volume Level 3 Level 1 to 5 | |||
| Distance which a sensor detects | 4.9 ft. (150 cm) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) | ||
| Illumination (→P. 306) | Time elapsed before lights turn off | 15 seconds | 7.5 seconds |
| 30 seconds | |||
| Operation when the doors are unlocked | On Off | ||
| Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF | On Off | ||
| Front footwell lights On Off | |||
| Shift lever light On Off | |||
| Outer foot lights On Off | |||
| Seat belt reminder (→P. 444) | Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer | On Off | |
Multi-information display ( P.146)
Country Languages
Canada English and French
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
| Item When to initialize Reference | ||
| Power window | After reconnecting or changing the battery | P.69 |
| Engine oil maintenance data | After changing engine oil P. 374 | |
| Tire pressure warning system | When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed | P.386 |
6-3. Initialization
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners....522
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 523
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
natural_image
Illustration of a person in a suit sitting on an inverted chair, holding a seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)natural_image
Illustration of a child inside a car seatbelt, with a red arrow indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)What to do if... 538
For details of equipment related to the navigation system, such as the audio system, refer to the "Navigation System Owner's Manual".
| ABBREVIATIONS MEANING | |
| ABS Anti-lock Brake System | |
| AFS Adaptive Front-lighting System | |
| AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift | |
| ALR Automatic Locking Retractor | |
| CRS Child Restraint System | |
| DISP Display | |
| ECU Electronic Control Unit | |
| EDR Event Data Recorder | |
| ELR Emergency Locking Retractor | |
| EPS Electric Power Steering | |
| GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating | |
| I/M Emission inspection and maintenance | |
| LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children | |
| LED | Light Emitting Diode |
| LSD | Limited Slip Differential |
| MMT | Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl |
| M + S | Mud and Snow |
| MTBE | Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether |
| OBD | On Board Diagnostics |
| PCS Pre-Collision System | |
| SRS Supplemental Restraint System | |
| TIN | Tire Identification Number |
| TPMS | Tire Pressure Warning System |
| TRAC | Traction Control |
| VDIM | Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management |
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
Alphabetical index Alphabetical index
A
A/C 198
ABS....177
ACCESSORY mode 124
AFS....151
Adaptive front lighting system .....151
Air conditioning filter 403
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter 403
Automatic air conditioning system....198
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions......88
Airbag precautions for your child....92
Airbag warning light 442
Curtain shield airbag operating conditions....88
Curtain shield airbag precautions 92
Front passenger occupant classification system....97
General airbag precautions ..... 92
Locations of airbags......85
Modification and disposal of airbags....96
Proper driving posture...... 83, 92
Side airbag operating conditions....88
Side airbag precautions....92
SRS airbags 85
Alarm....80
Antenna....215
Anti-lock brake system....177
Armrest 327
Ashtrays 322
Audio input 252
Audio system
Antenna....215
Audio input....252
AUX adapter....252
Bluetooth ^® audio 257
CD player/changer.....218
iPod ^® 233
MP3/WMA disc....225
Optimal use 250
Portable music player....252
Radio 210
Steering wheel audio switch..... 254
USB memory 241
Automatic air conditioning
system 198
Automatic headlight leveling
system 152
Automatic light control system.....150
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .....128
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P....475
M mode 132
AUX adapter 252
B
Back-up lights
Wattage 498
Battery
Checking....382
If the vehicle has a discharged battery....480
Preparing and checking before winter....192
Bluetooth ^® audio.....257
Bluetooth ^® phone....275
Bottle holders 315
Brake
Fluid....380
Parking brake....137
Brake assist....177
C
Care
Exterior 354
Interior 357
Seat belts 358
Cargo capacity 188
Cargo hooks.... 332
CD changer 218
CD player....218
Chains....192
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition ..... 102
Booster seats, installation .....108
Convertible seats, definition...... 102
Convertible seats, installation.....108
Front passenger occupant classification system....97
Infant seats, definition....102
Infant seats, installation.....108
Installing CRS with lower anchorages....107
Installing CRS with seat belts.....108
Installing CRS with top straps..... 112
Child safety
Airbag precautions....92
Battery precautions ....383, 482
Child restraint system....102
Child-protectors 40
How your child should wear the seat belt ....60
Installing child restraints......106
Moon roof precautions....74
Power window lock switch......69
Power window precautions .....70
Removed electronic key battery precautions....407
Seat belt comfort guide....58
Seat belt extender precautions..... 62
Seat belt precautions 61
Seat heater precautions......326
Trunk precautions....45
Child-protectors......40
Cigarette lighter 323
Cleaning
Exterior 354
Interior....357
Seat belts....358
Clock 318
Coat hooks.... 330
Compass 341
Condenser 380
Console box 311
Cooling system
Engine overheating 483
Cornering assist sensors ....171
Cruise control
Cruise control 158
Dynamic radar cruise control..... 161
Cup holders 313
Curtain shield airbags....85
Customizable features 514
D
Daytime running light system .....151
Defogger
Rear window....206
Side mirrors....206
Dimension......488
Dinghy towing 195
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control..... 161
Satellite switch mode....319
Trip information....147
Warning message....451
Do-it-yourself maintenance...... 366
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights....306
Wattage....498
Door pockets 315
Doors
Door lock....26,37,39
Door windows....69
Side mirrors....67
Driver's seat belt reminder light..... 444
Driving
Correct posture......83
Procedures....116
Driving position memory...... 48
E
Electric power steering......177
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not operate properly....477
Emergency flashers
Switch 430
Emergency, in case of
If the engine will not start......474
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 475
If the vehicle has a discharged battery....480
If the warning buzzer sounds.....441
If the warning light turns on.....441
If a warning message is displayed ....451
If you have a flat tire ....465
If you lose your keys 476
If you think something is wrong....437
If the electronic key does not operate properly....477
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....486
If your vehicle needs to be towed....431
If your vehicle overheats.....483
Engine
ACCESSORY mode......124
Compartment 372
Engine switch 124
Hood 369
How to start the engine....124
Identification number......489
If the engine will not start......474
Ignition switch....124
Overheating....483
Engine compartment cover......373
Engine coolant
Capacity......493
Checking 378
Preparing and checking before winter ....192
Engine coolant temperature
gauge....139
Engine immobilizer system....78
Engine oil
Capacity 492
Checking 374
Preparing and checking before winter ....192
Engine oil maintenance data......376
EPS 177
Event data recorder 439
F
First-aid kit storage belt ....332
Floor mat 331
Fluid
Brake....380
Washer 385
Fog lights
Switch....153
Wattage....498
Footwell lights 306
Front fog lights
Switch....153
Wattage 498
Front passenger occupant
classification system 97
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light....444
Front seats
Adjustment......47
Driving position memory......48
Seat position memory.... 52
Front turn signal lights
Switch 136
Wattage....498
Fuel
Capacity....491
Fuel gauge 139
Fuel pump shut off system .....438
Gas station information....540
Information......499
Refueling 75
Fuel door 75
Fuel filler door 75
Fuel pump shut off system......438
Fuses 408
G
Garage door opener ....335
Gas station information.... 540
Gauges 139
Glove box....310
Glove box light 311
H
Hands-free system for mobile phone....275
Hazard lights
Switch 430
Head restraints
Adjusting 54
Headlight aim 422
Headlight cleaner....157
Headlights
Discharge headlight precautions.... 428
Replacing light bulbs....424
Switch....150
Wattage....498
Heaters
Seat heaters 325
Side mirrors.... 206
Hill-start assist control....177
Hood....369
Hooks
Cargo....332
Coat.... 330
Shopping bag 332
Horn....138
|
I/M test 365
Identification
Engine......489
Vehicle....489
Ignition switch 124
Illuminated entry system....306
Indicator lights 143
Initialization
Items to initialize....519
Inside rear view mirror....66
Interior lights
Interior lights....306
Switch....308
Wattage....498
Jack
Positioning a floor jack 370
Vehicle-equipped jack......465
Jack handle...... 465
K Keyless entry....37
Keys
Electronic key....22
Engine switch 124
If you lose your keys 476
If the electronic key does not operate properly....477
Key number....22
Keyless entry....37
Keys....22
Mechanical key 23
Wireless remote control key......37
L Lexus Enform\*
Light bulbs
Replacing....424
Wattage 498
Lights
Door courtesy lights ....306
Emergency flasher switch.....430
Fog light switch....153
Hazard light switch....430
Headlights switch....150
Interior light switch....308
Outer foot lights....306
Personal light switch....308
Replacing light bulbs 424
Shift lever light....306
Turn signal lever....136
Vanity lights.... 317
Wattage....498
Load capacity....191
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance...... 366
General maintenance ....362
Maintenance data.... 488
Maintenance requirements .....360
Meter
Instrument panel light control..... 141
Meters....139
Micro dust and pollen filter......202
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror......66
Side mirror heater 206
Side mirrors 67
Vanity mirrors....317
Moon roof....71
MP3 disc....225
Multi-information display 146
N Noise from under vehicle....17
Odometer....139
Oil
Engine oil....374
Opener
Fuel filler door....75
Hood 369
Trunk 43
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights 306
Wattage 498
P
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding 67
Mirror position memory ....48
Outside temperature display......147
Overhead console 312
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights ....306
Wattage....498
Overheating, Engine......483
Parking assist sensors....171
Parking brake....137
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs.... 424
Switch 150
Wattage....498
PCS 184
Personal lights
Switch 308
Power outlet....324
Power windows 69
Pre-collision system....184
R
Radar cruise control....161
Radiator 380
Radio....210
RDS 212
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.... 424
Wattage....498
Rear view mirror
Compass 341
Rear window defogger.....206
S
Replacing
Electronic key battery......406
Fuses....408
Light bulbs 424
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners.... 522
Safety connect....345
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.... 58
Automatic locking retractor...... 59
Child restraint system installation....106
Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts ....358
Emergency locking retractor...... 59
How to wear your seat belt .....57
How your child should wear the seat belt....60
Pregnant women, proper seat belt use .... 59
Reminder light....444
Seat belt extenders.... 60
Seat belt pretensioners 58
Seat heaters....325
Seat position memory....52
Seating capacity....191
Seats
Adjustment 47
Adjustment precautions 47
Child seats/child restraint system installation......106
Cleaning 357
Driver's seat position memory ..... 48
Front passenger seat position memory ....52
Head restraints 54
Properly sitting in the seat...... 83
Seat heaters.... 325
Service reminder indicators .....143
Shift lever
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 475
Transmission....128
Shift lever light.... 306
Shift lock system 475
Shopping bag hooks.... 332
Side airbags....85
Side marker lights Switch....150
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding 67
Mirror position memory......48
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function 26
Starting the engine....124
"SOS" button 345
Spare tire
Inflation pressure 397
Storage location....465
Spark plug....494
Specifications......488
Speedometer....139
Steering wheel
Adjustment 64
Audio switches 254
Steering wheel position memory 48
Storage feature....310
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....486
Sun visors 316
Sunshade....72
Switch
Emergency flasher switch ..... 430
Engine switch....124
Fog light switch 153
F-sport mode total control switch....130, 180
Hazard light switch 430
Ignition switch....124
Light switches 150
Power door lock switch ....39
Power window switch....69
Satellite switches.... 319
Transmission shift switches....130, 132
Window lock switch....69
Wiper and washer switch.....154
T
Tachometer....139
Tail lights
Switch....150
Talk switch 280
Telephone switch....280
Theft deterrent system
Alarm....80
Engine immobilizer system....78
Theft prevention labels......82
Tire inflation pressure 397
Tire information
Glossary 507
Size....504
Tire identification number......504
Uniform tire quality grading .....505
Tires
Chains....192
Checking....386
If you have a flat tire....465
Inflation pressure.... 397
Inflation pressure sensor....386
Information....502
Replacing....465
Rotating tires....386
Size 497
Snow tires....192
Tools......465
Total load capacity ....191
Towing
Dinghy towing....195
Emergency towing 431
Trailer towing....194
TRAC....177
Traction control....177
Transmission shift switches.....130, 132
Trip meter 139
Trunk
Extending trunk space....328
Opener 43
Trunk light
Trunk light 44
Wattage....498
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.... 424
Switch 136
Wattage....498
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.... 317
Wattage....498
Vanity mirrors 317
VDIM....177
Vehicle dynamics integrated management....177
Vehicle identification number......489
Vehicle stability control .....177
Voice command switch 280
VSC....177
W
Warning buzzers
Brake system.... 441
Open door 444
Seat belt reminder....444
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ....442
Brake assist system 442
Brake system.... 441
Charging system....442
Electric power steering warning light....442
Low fuel level....444
Malfunction indicator lamp .....442
Master warning light....444
Open door 444
Pre-collision system....442
Pretensioners 442
Seat belt reminder light......444
SRS airbags....442
Tire pressure warning light....444
Warning messages
Automatic transmission fluid......455
Dynamic radar cruise control.....453, 455
Engine oil level....455
Engine oil maintenance.....455
Engine oil pressure.... 452
Engine oil temperature.... 452
Hood 455
Intuitive parking assist .....453, 455
Moon roof 455
Open door 455
Parking brake....455
Pre-collision system.....453, 455
Smart access system with push-button start....461
Steering lock....453
Trunk 455
Washer fluid....455
Washer
Checking....385
Preparing and checking before winter....192
Switch....154
Washing and waxing 354
Weight
Cargo capacity....188
Load limits 191
Weight......488
Wheels....401
Window glasses 69
Window lock switch 69
Windows
Power windows....69
Rear window defogger...... 206
Washer 154
Windshield wipers....154
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery...... 406
WMA disc 225
A tire punctures
P.465
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P.474
If the engine will not start
P.78
Engine immobilizer system
P.480
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
P.475
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone
P.483
If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming from under the hood
The key is lost
P.476
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P.480
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P.39
Doors
The horn begins to sound
P.80
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand
P. 486
If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light comes on
P.441
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with dual gauges and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)■Warning lights
or or
Brake system warning light Malfunction motor lamp
P.441 P.442
ABS warning light
P.442P.444
Driver's seat belt reminder light P. 444
Low fuel level warning light Master P. 444 P. 444
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
SRS warning light Electric power steer P.442 P. 442
ght
Open door warning light P. 444 P. 442
light
Charging system warning light P.442P.444
Pre-collision system warning light
ng message is dis-
Tire pressure warning light
P.451
If a warning message is displayed
GAS STATION INFORMATION
| Fuel tank capacity 16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal.) | |
| Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 76, 491 | |
| Cold tire inflation pressure | P.497 |
| Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill) | qt. (L, Imp. qt.)Without filter 8.7 (8.2 , 72)With filter 9.8 (9.3, 8.2) |
| Engine oil type | Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalentOil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 492Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30 |
LEXUS
Owner's Manual:
Publication No. OM53777U
Part No. 01999-53777
Printed in Japan 03-1001-02
IS F (北米U)
- Before driving
- 1-1. Key information
- 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
- 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
- 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
- 1-5. Refueling
- 1-6. Theft deterrent system
- 1-7. Safety information
- When driving
- 2-1. Driving procedures
- 2-2. Instrument cluster
- 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
- 2-4. Using other driving systems
- 2-5. Driving information
- Interior features
- 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
- 3-2. Using the audio system
- 3-3. Using the Bluetooth ^ audio system
- 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)
- TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
- 3-5. Using the interior lights
- 3-6. Using the storage features
- 3-7. Other interior features
- Maintenance and care
- 4-1. Maintenance and care
- 4-2. Maintenance
- 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
- When trouble arises
- 5-1. Essential information
- 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
- Vehicle specifications
- 6-1. Specifications
- 6-2. Customization
- 6-3. Initialization
- For owners
- Index
- Pictorial index
- Exterior
- Interior
- B
- C
- Instrument panel
- A
- ▶ Without navigation system (type A)
- ▶ Without navigation system (type B)
- ▶ Type B Type A
- D
- E
- For your information
- Main Owner's Manual
- Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
- Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
- Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
- Scrapping of your Lexus
- Perchlorate Material
- CAUTION
- ■General precautions while driving
- ■General precaution regarding children's safety
- Symbols used throughout this manual
- Cautions & Notices
- NOTICE
- Symbols used in illustrations
- Safety symbol
- Arrows indicating operations
- Before driving
- 1
- Using the mechanical key
- Card key
- ■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
- ■Key number plate
- ■When riding in an aircraft
- ■To prevent key damage
- ■Precautions for handling the card keys
- 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start
- Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
- Unlocking the trunk
- Antenna location and effective range
- Antenna location
- ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
- Operation signals
- ■ Conditions affecting operation
- ■Switching the door unlock function
- Battery-saving function
- ■Electronic key battery depletion
- ■ To operate the system properly
- ■Note for the entry function
- ■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
- ■Security feature
- ■Alarms and warning indicators
- NOTE:
- FCC WARNING:
- ■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
- Wireless remote control
- Door lock buzzer
- Alarm
- Electronic key battery depletion
- ■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
- ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
- ■Certification for wireless remote control
- Doors
- Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
- Rear door child-protector lock
- Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
- Setting and canceling the functions
- ■Impact detection door lock release system
- ■ Using the mechanical key
- ■To prevent an accident
- 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk
- Locking the trunk opener feature
- Trunk light
- Trunk handle
- ■Internal trunk release lever
- ■Caution while driving
- ■When children are in the vehicle
- Using the trunk
- Front seats
- Seat adjustment
- Driving position memory (driver's seat)
- Entering a position to memory
- | Recalling the memorized position
- Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
- ■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
- - Operating the driving position memory after turning the "ENGINE START STOP" switch OFF
- ■ To cancel seat position recall
- ■ If the battery is disconnected
- ■Seat adjustment caution
- 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat position memory (front passenger's seat)
- ■Entering a position to memory
- ■Recalling the memorized position
- Head restraints
- Head restraints are provided for all seats.
- ■Removing the head restraints (front seats)
- ■Installing the head restraints (front seats)
- ■Removing the head restraints (rear seats)
- ■Installing the head restraints (rear seats)
- Seat belts
- ■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
- Seat belt comfort guide (rear seats)
- Seat belt pretensioners
- Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
- Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
- ■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
- ■ Pregnant women
- ■ People suffering illness
- ■Child seat belt usage
- ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
- ■Seat belt extender
- ■Wearing a seat belt
- ■Adjustable shoulder anchor
- ■Seat belt pretensioners
- ■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
- ■Seat belt damage and wear
- ■ Using a seat belt extender
- ■When using a seat belt extender
- 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel
- Auto tilt away
- ■The steering wheel can be adjusted when
- ■Automatic adjustment of the steering position
- Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
- ■ To prevent sensor error
- Caution while driving
- Outside rear view mirrors
- ■Linked mirror function when reversing
- ■ Auto anti-glare function
- ■When driving the vehicle
- ■When the mirror defoggers are operating
- 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows
- Lock switch
- 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof\*
- Opening and closing
- Open\*
- Close\*
- - Tilting up and down
- Tilt up\*
- ② Tilt down\*
- ■When the moon roof does not close normally
- ■ Opening the moon roof
- Closing the moon roof
- Jam protection function
- Opening the fuel tank cap
- Before refueling the vehicle
- ■ Opening the fuel tank cap
- Closing the fuel tank cap
- Fuel types
- ■Fuel tank capacity (reference)
- ■When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
- ■Refueling the vehicle
- ■When replacing the fuel cap
- Refueling
- 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system
- System maintenance
- ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
- ■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
- ■ To ensure the system correctly
- Triggering of the alarm
- Setting the alarm system
- ■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
- Items to check before locking the vehicle
- Panic mode
- ■When the battery is disconnected
- 1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
- While driving
- ■Adjusting the seat position:
- Airbag system components
- ■SRS warning light
- ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
- ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
- ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
- ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
- ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (front airbags)
- ■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (side and curtain shield airbags)
- ■When to contact your Lexus dealer
- ■SRS airbag precautions
- ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
- Front passenger occupant classification system
- Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
- Adult \*1
- ■Child *3 or child restraint system *4
- ■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
- 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems
- Points to remember
- Types of child restraints
- ■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
- ■Child restraint precautions
- ■When the child restraint system is not in use
- 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints
- Installation with LATCH system
- ▶ Type A
- ▶ Type B
- Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
- ■ Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat
- Forward facing — Convertible seat
- Booster seat
- Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
- Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
- ■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
- ■When installing a booster seat
- ■When installing a child restraint system
- ■ Do not use a seat belt extender
- ■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
- When driving
- 2
- Starting on a steep uphill
- ■ Starting off on a hill
- - Driving in the rain
- ■Breaking in your new Lexus
- ■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
- ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
- When starting off
- ■When driving on slippery road surfaces
- ■When shifting the shift lever
- ■When the vehicle is stopped
- ■When the vehicle is parked
- Exhaust gases
- ■When taking a nap in the vehicle
- ■When braking the vehicle
- ■When parking the vehicle
- ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
- If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
- If you get a flat tire while driving
- ■When encountering flooded roads
- 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch
- Starting the engine
- Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch mode
- OFF\*
- ACCESSORY mode
- IGNITION ON mode
- ■If the engine does not start
- ■When the steering lock cannot be released
- ■When the "ENGINE START STOP" switch indicator flashes in amber
- ■ Auto power off function
- ■When the electronic key battery is discharged
- ■When starting the engine
- ■Stopping the engine in an emergency
- ■To prevent battery discharge
- ■ Selecting a driving mode
- Selecting shift ranges in the D position
- Selecting gears in the M position
- - When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
- ■Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
- Rev buzzer
- ■Downshift restrictions warning buzzer
- ■When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
- ■Automatic deactivation of snow mode and "Sport" mode
- ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
- If is not displayed after shifting the shift lever to M
- ■ Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
- If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed
- AI-SHIFT
- Turn signal lever
- Parking brake
- ■ Usage in winter time
- Horn
- Instrument panel light control
- ■When the temperature of the display is extremely low
- ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
- 2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights
- Indicators
- Warning lights
- If a safety system warning light does not come on
- Trip information
- Driving range
- Average fuel consumption
- ■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
- Current fuel consumption
- Average vehicle speed
- Gear position display
- ■ Outside temperature display
- ■The information display at low temperatures
- Headlight switch
- Turning on the high beam headlights
- AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
- Deactivating AFS
- ■Daytime running light system
- ■Headlight control sensor
- ■Automatic light off system
- ■Automatic headlight leveling system
- ■ If the "AFS OFF" indicator flashes...
- ■ To prevent battery discharge
- Fog light switch
- Windshield wipers and washer
- ■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
- ■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
- ■ "AUTO" mode
- ■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper operation
- ■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
- ■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in "AUTO" mode
- ■When the windshield is dry
- ■When a nozzle becomes blocked
- ■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
- 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight cleaner switch\*
- ■The headlight cleaner can be operated when
- ■Windshield washer linked operation
- ■When the washer fluid tank is empty
- Cruise control\*
- ■Adjusting the speed setting
- - Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
- Cancel
- Resume
- ■ Cruise control can be set when
- Accelerating
- ■Automatic cruise control cancellation
- ■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
- ■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
- ■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
- 2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control\*
- - Driving in the selected cruise control mode
- - Canceling and resuming the speed setting
- ■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
- Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
- ■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
- ■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control
- ■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
- ■Radar sensor and grille cover
- Certification
- FCC WARNING
- ■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
- ■To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
- ■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
- ■When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
- ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly
- ■To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
- Intuitive parking assist\*
- Types of sensors
- ■ Multi-information display ( → P. 146)
- ■ Switching the intuitive parking assist on ( → P. 319)
- The display and buzzer system
- ■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
- ■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
- Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
- Detection range of the sensors
- ■Sensor detection information
- ■If the display flashes and a message is displayed
- ■Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
- ■ Notes when washing the vehicle
- ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
- Brake assist
- VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
- TRAC (Traction Control)
- Hill-start assist control
- EPS (Electric Power Steering)
- VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
- ■PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
- When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
- To disable TRAC and/or VSC
- Turning off TRAC
- F-sport mode total control switch
- ■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
- ■Automatic TRAC reactivation
- ■Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
- ■The ABS does not operate effectively when
- ■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions
- ■TRAC may not operate effectively when
- If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
- ■When the VSC is activated
- ■When TRAC and VSC are off
- Replacing tires
- ■Handling of tires and suspension
- 2-4. Using other driving systems PCS (Pre-Collision System)\*
- ■ Pre-collision seat belts
- ■ Pre-collision brake assist
- Radar sensor
- Obstacles not detected
- ■The pre-collision system is operational when
- ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
- ■When there is a malfunction in the system
- ■Handling the radar sensor
- ■Limitations of the pre-collision system
- Capacity and distribution
- Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
- Example on your vehicle
- ■Things that must not be carried in the trunk
- Storage precautions
- Luggage capacity and distribution
- ■Pre-winter preparations
- Before driving the vehicle
- When driving the vehicle
- ■ When parking the vehicle
- ■Driving with snow tires
- ■Driving with tire chains
- ■Repairing or replacing snow tires
- Trailer towing
- Dinghy towing
- ■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
- Interior features
- 3
- 3-3. Using the Bluetooth ® audio system
- Automatic air conditioning system
- Using the automatic mode
- STEP1 Press
- STEP3 Press "^" on
- Adjusting the settings
- ■Adjusting the temperature setting
- ■Changing the air outlets
- ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
- Defogging the windshield
- Micro dust and pollen filter
- Press.
- Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
- Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
- ■ Using the automatic mode
- ■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
- ■ Window defogger feature
- ■ When outside air temperature approaches 32° F ( 0° C)
- ■When the indicator light on flashes
- ■Automatic mode for air intake control
- ■Micro dust and pollen filter
- ■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
- 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
- On/off
- ■The defogger can be operated when
- ■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
- Audio system type
- ■ Using cellular phones
- ■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
- ■To avoid damaging the audio system
- Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
- Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A)
- ■ Scanning the preset radio stations
- ■ Scanning all radio stations within range
- RDS (Radio Data System) (type A)
- ■Receiving RDS broadcasts
- XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
- ■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
- ■Displaying text information
- ■Reception sensitivity
- XM® Satellite Radio
- ■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
- "CH UNAVL"
- ■Certifications for the radio tuner
- Loading CDs
- Loading a CD
- ■ Loading multiple CDs
- Ejecting CDs
- Ejecting a CD
- ■Ejecting all the CDs
- Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
- ■Selecting a track
- Scanning a CD (type A)
- Selecting a CD
- ■ To select a CD to play
- ■To scan loaded CDs (type A)
- Random playback
- Current CD
- All CDs
- Repeat play
- To repeat a track
- ■To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
- Playing and pausing tracks
- Switching the display
- Press TEXT.
- ■Display
- ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
- ■When "LOAD", "ERROR" or "WAIT" is shown on the display
- ■ Discs that can be used
- ■CD player protection feature
- If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
- Lens cleaners
- ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
- CD player precautions
- Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
- Selecting a folder
- Fast-forwarding and reversing files
- Selecting and scanning files
- ■ Selecting one file at a time
- ■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
- ■ Repeating a file
- ■Repeating all of the files in a folder
- ■To play files from a particular folder in random order
- ■To play all of the files on a disc in random order
- Playing and pausing files
- Press
- ■When "LOAD", "ERROR", "WAIT" or "NO MUSIC" is shown on the display
- ■Discs that can be used
- ■ CD player protection feature
- ■MP3 and WMA files
- ●MP3 file compatibility
- Operating an iPod®
- Connecting an iPod®
- Press AUX
- Control panel
- Selecting a play mode
- ■Selecting a list
- Selecting songs
- Playing and pausing songs
- Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
- Shuffle playback
- Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
- About iPod®
- iPod® functions
- iPod® problems
- Display
- ■ Canceling shuffle and repeat playback
- Error messages
- ■Compatible models
- To prevent damage to iPod®
- Operating a USB memory
- ■ Connecting a USB memory
- ■Selecting folders one at a time
- ■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder (type A)
- ■ Returning to the first folder
- Selecting files
- ■Selecting one file at a time
- ■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A)
- Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
- ■ Repeating all the files in a folder
- USB memory functions
- USB memory
- ●MP3 and WMA playback
- • Extensions
- ●Playback
- ■To prevent damage to USB memory
- Optimal use of the audio system
- Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
- ■Changing sound quality modes
- ■Adjusting sound quality
- Using the AUX adapter
- Using the steering wheel audio switches
- Turning on the power
- Changing the audio source
- Adjusting the volume
- Selecting a radio station
- Selecting a track/file or song
- Selecting an album
- Selecting a disc in the CD player
- ■To reduce the risk of an accident
- ■Conditions under which the system will not operate
- ■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
- About Bluetooth®
- ■ Compatible models
- ■Certification for the Bluetooth ® audio system
- ■To prevent damage to portable players
- 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
- Using the Bluetooth ® audio system
- Audio unit
- Display
- Operating the system using voice commands
- Operation procedure when using voice commands
- ■Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
- Using the Bluetooth ® audio system for the first time
- ■When using a voice command
- ■Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
- ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
- ■Changing the passkey
- Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
- Selecting tracks
- Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
- Scanning tracks
- Bluetooth ® audio system functions
- Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
- ■Functions and operation procedures
- ▶ Pattern A
- ▶ Pattern B
- Registering a portable player
- Selecting a portable player to be used
- Changing the registered name of a portable player
- Listing the registered portable players
- Changing the passkey
- Deleting a registered portable player
- ■ System setup items and operation procedures
- Hands-free system for mobile phones\*
- ■When using the hands-free system
- ■Certification for the hands-free system
- ■ To prevent damage to mobile phones
- Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)
- ■ Steering wheel switches
- Volume
- Off-hook switch
- On-hook switch
- Talk switch
- Microphone
- Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
- Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
- Menu list of the hands-free phone system
- ■Automatic volume adjustment
- Making a phone call
- ■Making a phone call
- ■Receiving a phone call
- ■Transferring a phone call
- Call waiting
- ■ Using the call history memory
- Dialing by inputting a number
- Dialing by inputting a name
- Speed dialing
- When receiving a phone call
- ■Answering a phone call
- ■Refusing a phone call
- Transferring a phone call
- Using the call history memory
- Call history
- ■When talking on the phone
- Setting a mobile phone
- Registering a mobile phone
- Selecting a mobile phone to be used
- Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
- Listing the registered mobile phones
- Deleting a registered mobile phone
- ■ Security setting items and operation procedures
- System setup items and operation procedures
- Setting or changing the PIN
- Setting a PIN
- ■Changing the PIN
- Locking or unlocking the phone book
- Setting voice guidance volume
- Displaying the Bluetooth ® device address and name
- Initializing the system
- ■Initialization
- ■When the phone book is locked
- Using the phone book
- Adding a new phone number
- ■ Adding procedure
- Changing the registered name in the phone book
- Listing the registered data
- Setting speed dials
- Deleting the registered data
- Deleting speed dials
- Interior lights
- Personal lights
- Glove box
- Glove box light
- ■ Trunk opener main switch
- Console box
- ■ Console box light
- ■ Using the console box to store CD cases
- Overhead console
- ■Items that should not be left in the overhead console
- Cup holders
- ▶ Rear
- ■ Using the front cup holder (slide type) to store small items
- ■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
- When not in use
- Bottle holders/door pockets
- Sun visors
- Vanity mirrors
- Clock
- ■The clock is displayed when
- Operating the satellite switches
- Items that can be set using the satellite switches
- ■Changing the settings
- Ashtrays
- Front
- To prevent fire
- Cigarette lighter
- ■The cigarette lighter can be used when
- ■To avoid burns or fires
- Power outlet
- Seat heaters
- Heats the seats
- ■The seat heaters can be used when
- Burns
- ■To prevent seat heater damage
- Armrest
- ■ To prevent damage to the armrest
- Trunk storage extension
- Coat hooks
- ■Items that must not be hung on the hook
- Floor mat
- ■When inserting the floor mat
- Trunk features
- ■ Warning triangle storage belt
- Luggage mat
- ■When the cargo hooks are not in use
- ■When closing the trunk
- Garage door opener
- Programming the HomeLink ® (for U.S.A. owners)
- ■Programming the HomeLink®
- ■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
- ■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market
- ■ Programming other devices
- ■Reprogramming a button
- Operating the HomeLink®
- Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
- Erasing the entire HomeLink ® memory (all three programs)
- Before programming
- ■Certification for the garage door opener
- ■When support is necessary
- ■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
- ■Conforming to federal safety standards
- Compass
- Operation
- ■Displays and directions
- Calibrating the compass
- ■Deviation calibration
- Circling calibration
- ■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
- ■While driving the vehicle
- ■When doing the circling calibration
- ■To avoid compass malfunctions
- ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
- Services
- Subscription
- ■Safety Connect Services Information
- Languages
- ■When contacting the response center
- Safety Connect LED light Indicators
- Safety Connect services
- ■Automatic Collision Notification
- ■Stolen Vehicle Location
- Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")
- ■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
- Safety information for Safety Connect
- ■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
- License
- ■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
- Maintenance and care
- 4
- Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
- Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
- ■Automatic car washes
- ■High pressure car washes
- Aluminum wheels
- Bumpers
- ■To prevent deterioration and body corrosion
- ■Exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers
- To protect your vehicle's painted surfaces
- ■Cleaning the exterior lights
- ■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
- ■When using an automatic car wash
- ■ Protecting the vehicle interior
- Cleaning the leather areas
- Synthetic leather areas
- Caring for leather areas
- Shampooing the carpets
- Water in the vehicle
- ■Cleaning detergents
- ■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
- Water on the floor
- ■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
- General maintenance
- Scheduled maintenance
- Do-it-yourself maintenance
- ■ Repair and replacement
- - Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
- ■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
- ■Warning in handling of battery
- If the engine is running
- If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
- - Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
- - When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
- If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
- Do-it-yourself service precautions
- ■When working on the engine compartment:
- ■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
- Safety glasses
- If you remove the air cleaner filter
- Hood
- ■Pre-driving check
- Positioning a floor jack
- ■When raising your vehicle:
- Engine compartment cover
- Engine oil
- - Checking the engine oil
- ■ Adding engine oil
- ■Engine oil consumption
- ■After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
- ■Used engine oil
- ■To prevent serious engine damage
- ■When replacing the engine oil
- Engine coolant
- If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
- Coolant selection
- ■When the engine is hot
- ■When adding engine coolant
- If you spill coolant
- Radiator and condenser
- Brake fluid
- - Checking fluid level
- Adding fluid
- ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
- ■When filling the reservoir
- ■ If the fluid level is low or high
- Battery
- Battery exterior
- - Checking battery condition (vehicles with the battery indicator)
- Before recharging
- ■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
- ■Chemicals in the battery
- ■Where to safely charge the battery
- How to recharge the battery
- Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
- ■When recharging the battery
- Washer fluid
- ■When adding washer fluid
- Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
- Diluting washer fluid
- Tires
- Checking tires
- The tire pressure warning system
- Installing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
- Initializing the tire pressure warning system
- Registering and selecting ID codes
- Registering ID codes
- Selecting ID codes
- - When to replace your vehicle’s tires
- ■Replacing tires and wheels
- Tire life
- ■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
- Tire rotation
- Tire replacement
- Low profile tires
- ■Maximum load of tire
- Tire types
- Summer tires
- All season tires
- Snow tires
- ■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
- If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
- ■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
- ■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
- ■When inspecting or replacing tires
- ■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
- ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters and tire valve caps
- To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
- - Driving on rough roads
- If tire inflation pressure becomes low while driving
- Tire inflation pressure
- ■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
- ■Tire inflation pressure check interval
- ■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
- ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
- ■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
- ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
- Wheel selection
- Aluminum wheel precautions
- ■When replacing wheels
- ■Tire and wheel replacement
- ■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
- Air conditioning filter
- Removal method
- Cleaning method
- Replacement method
- - Checking interval
- If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
- ■To prevent damage to the system
- Electronic key battery
- You will need the following items:
- Replacing the battery
- ■If the electronic key battery is discharged
- ■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
- ■When the card key battery needs to be replaced (Canada only)
- ■Removed battery and other parts
- For normal operation after replacing the battery
- Checking and replacing fuses
- STEP6 Check if the fuse has blown.
- ▶ Type C
- Normal fuse
- ② Blown fuse
- Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B)
- Fuse layout and amperage ratings
- Engine compartment (type A)
- ■After a fuse is replaced
- If there is an overload in the circuits
- ■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
- ■Before replacing fuses
- Light bulbs
- Replacing light bulbs
- Rear turn signal lights
- ■ Bulbs other than the above
- ■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
- ■Discharge headlights
- ■LED tail lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
- ■Replacing light bulbs
- ■To prevent damage or fire
- When trouble arises
- 5
- 5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers
- If your vehicle needs to be towed
- Before towing
- Emergency towing
- Emergency towing procedure
- Caution while towing
- ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
- Installing the towing eyelet
- ■Installing the towing eyelet to the vehicle
- Towing with a sling-type truck
- ■To prevent body damage
- Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
- ■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
- ■To prevent damaging the vehicle
- Using a flat bed truck
- If you think something is wrong
- Visible symptoms
- Audible symptoms
- Operational symptoms
- Fuel pump shut off system
- ■ Before starting the engine
- Event data recorder
- In a crash or a near car crash event
- Disclosure of the data
- If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
- Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
- Warning light Warning light/Details
- Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) *
- Stop the vehicle immediately.
- Charging system warning light
- Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
- Malfunction indicator lamp
- SRS warning light
- Electric power steering warning light
- ■When the electric power steering warning light comes on
- Follow the correction procedures.
- If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
- Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
- ■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
- The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
- ■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
- ■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
- If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
- ■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
- If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
- ■Maintenance of the tires
- ■Precaution when installing a different tire
- If a warning message is displayed
- Warning message Details
- ■Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
- ■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
- If you have a flat tire
- Before jacking up the vehicle
- ■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
- Taking out the spare tire
- Replacing a flat tire
- Installing the spare tire
- The compact spare tire
- ■When using the compact spare tire
- ■After completing the tire change
- Using the tire jack
- ■Replacing a flat tire
- ■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
- ■When the spare tire is installed
- ■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
- - Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle
- - Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
- ■When replacing the tires
- ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
- If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
- If you lose your keys
- If the electronic key does not operate properly
- Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
- ▶ Doors
- Trunk
- Changing "ENGINE START STOP" switch modes and starting the engine
- ■Stopping the engine
- ■Replacing the key battery
- If the vehicle battery is discharged
- ■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
- ■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
- Battery precautions
- ■When handling jumper cables
- If your engine overheats:
- Overheating
- ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
- If the vehicle becomes stuck
- ■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
- To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
- Vehicle specifications
- 6
- Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
- Vehicle identification
- ■ Vehicle identification number
- Engine number
- Lubrication system
- Engine oil selection
- Cooling system
- Ignition system
- ■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
- Electrical system
- Differential
- Automatic transmission
- Steering
- Tires and wheels
- ■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
- If your engine knocks
- Gasoline quality
- Gasoline quality standards
- Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
- ■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
- ■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
- ■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
- ■Notice on fuel quality
- ■Fuel-related poor driveability
- ■When refueling with gasohol
- Typical tire symbols
- Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
- Tire size
- ■Typical tire size information
- Tire dimensions
- Tire section names
- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
- DOT quality grades
- Treadwear
- Traction AA, A, B, C
- Temperature A, B, C
- Multi-information display ( → P.146)
- Country Languages
- Canada English and French
- Items to initialize
- For owners
- 7
- ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
- Alphabetical index Alphabetical index
- Back-up lights
- Brake
- Care
- Child restraint system
- Child safety
- Emergency, in case of
- Engine
- Engine coolant temperature
- F
- Fluid
- Fog lights
- Front fog lights
- Front passenger occupant
- Front turn signal lights
- Fuel
- G
- H
- Hazard lights
- Headlights
- Heaters
- Hooks
- |
- Identification
- Initialization
- Jack
- K Keyless entry....37
- Keys
- L Lexus Enform\*
- Lights
- M Maintenance
- Meter
- Mirrors
- N Noise from under vehicle....17
- Odometer....139
- Oil
- Opener
- Outer foot lights
- P
- R
- S
- Towing
- Turn signal lights
- V
- Vanity lights
- W
- Warning buzzers
- Warning messages
- Washer
- Weight
- Windows
- Wireless remote control key
- GAS STATION INFORMATION
Brand : LEXUS
Model : IS F (2010)
Category : Automobile